WO1999016453A1 - Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis - Google Patents

Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1999016453A1
WO1999016453A1 PCT/US1998/019906 US9819906W WO9916453A1 WO 1999016453 A1 WO1999016453 A1 WO 1999016453A1 US 9819906 W US9819906 W US 9819906W WO 9916453 A1 WO9916453 A1 WO 9916453A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
group
hydrogen
phenyl
substituted
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1998/019906
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
William Louis Macias
Original Assignee
Eli Lilly And Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Eli Lilly And Company filed Critical Eli Lilly And Company
Priority to CA002304482A priority Critical patent/CA2304482A1/en
Priority to US09/508,209 priority patent/US6576654B1/en
Priority to JP2000513587A priority patent/JP2001517707A/en
Priority to EP98950654A priority patent/EP1007056A1/en
Priority to AU96641/98A priority patent/AU9664198A/en
Publication of WO1999016453A1 publication Critical patent/WO1999016453A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives

Definitions

  • the present invention is directed to a method for treating cystic fibrosis . More specifically, the present invention is directed to a method for treating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an SPLA2 inhibitor.
  • Cystic fibrosis is a hereditary disorder of the lungs, digestive, and reproductive systems.
  • cystic fibrosis One in 2500 people in the general population in America are born with cystic fibrosis. It typically appears in early childhood and is a lifelong illness that generally gets more severe with age. Average life expectancy and quality of life are significantly reduced. There is no cure for cystic fibrosis at this time.
  • cystic fibrosis the glands which produce mucus, saliva, and intestinal fluids do not work properly. Thick mucus in the lungs interferes with removal of pollutants and can cause breathing problems, infections, and lung damage.
  • Thick secretions also may clog the pancreatic duct and block transfer of enzymes from the pancreas to the intestine. These enzymes help break down food so the body has proper growth and weight gain.
  • Major therapies for cystic fibrosis include the following:
  • agents that degrade the high concentration of DNA in cystic fibrosis e.g., human recombinant DNAse
  • drugs to restore salt and water balance e.g., amiloride, triphosphite nucleotides
  • pancreatic enzymes are taken with meals
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,453,443 describes bis (aryloxy) alkanes as inhibitors of phopholipase A2 enzymes useful for a list of many disease states, inclusive of cystic fibrosis.
  • the mechanism of action for airway inflammation in cystic fibrosis remains poorly understood, but arachidonic acid may have a role (see, "Cystic Fibrosis Gene Mutation (dF508) is Associated with Intrinsic Abnormality in Ca2 + - Induced Arachiodonic Acid Release by Epithelial Cells" by Miele, L . ; Cordella-Miele, Eleonora; Xing, Mingzhao;
  • This invention is a method of alleviating the symptoms of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis by administering a therapeutically effective amount of a selected SPLA2 inhibitor .
  • This invention is also a method of facilitating the clearance of retained pulmonary secretions in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis.
  • This invention is also a method of facilitating lung mucus clearance in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis. This invention is also a method of inhibiting inflammation in the lungs in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis .
  • This invention is also the use of SPLA2 inhibitors to reduce the complications of acute or chronic infections of the respiratory tree in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis .
  • This invention is also the use of SPLA2 inhibitors for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylactic or therapeutic treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis.
  • SPLA2 inhibitors for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylactic or therapeutic treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount is a quantity of SPLA2 inhibitor sufficient to significantly alleviate symptoms of cystic fibrosis in a human.
  • parenteral means not through the alimentary canal but by some other route such as subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraorbital, intracapsular, intraspinal, intrasternal, or intravenous.
  • active compound means one or more SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention.
  • SPLA2 secretary phopholipase A2
  • SPLA2 useful in the the method of the invention for treatment of cystic fibrosis are the following:
  • 1H-indole-1-hydrazides 1H-indole-1-acetamides indolizine-1-acetamides indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazides indolizine-1-glyoxylamides indene-1-acetamides indene-1-acetic acid hydrazides indene-1-glyoxylamides carbazoles & tetrahydrocarbazoles pyrazoles phenyl glyoxamides pyrroles naphthyl glyoxamides phenyl acetamides naphthyl acetamides
  • R! is selected from the group consisting of -C7-C20 alkyl
  • RIO is selected from the group consisting of halo, C -C o alkyl, C -C o alkoxy, -S- (C -C o alkyl) and halo (C -C ⁇ ) alkyl, and t is an integer from 0 to 5 both inclusive;
  • R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S- (C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), aryl, aryloxy and HET;
  • R4 is selected from the group consisting of -CO2H, -SO3H and -P(O) (OH) 2 or salt and prodrug derivatives thereof;
  • R5, R6 and R " ⁇ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, (C -Cg) alkoxy, halo (C -Cg) alkoxy, halo (C2 ⁇ Cg) alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo and aryl; which process comprises the steps of: a) halogenating a compound of formula X
  • R 8 is (C]_-Cg) alkyl, aryl or HET; w i th SO2CI2 to form a compound of formula IX
  • the synthesis methodology for making the lH-indole-3- glyoxylamide SPLA2 inhibitor starting material may be by any suitable means available to one skilled in the chemical arts. However, such methodology is not part of the present invention which is a method of use, specifically, a method of treating mammal afflicted or susceptible to cystic fibrosis.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the compound represented by formula (la), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein ; both X are oxygen;
  • R_ is selected from the group consisting of
  • R ⁇ o is a radical independently selected from halo, C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkyl, C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkoxy, -S- (C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkyl), and C ⁇ -C ⁇ o haloalkyl and t is a number from 0 to 5;
  • R2 is selected from the group; halo, cyclopropyl, methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
  • R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) .
  • -(L a )- is an acid linker; provided, the acid linker group, -(L a )-, for R4 is selected from the group consisting of; and provided, the acid linker, -(L a )-, for R5 is selected from group consisting of;
  • Rg4 and Rg5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkyl, aryl, C -C o alkaryl, C -C o aralkyl, carboxy, carbalkoxy, and halo; and provided, that at least one of R4 and R5 must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) and wherein the (acidic group) on the group - (L a ) - (acidic group) of R4 or R5 is selected from -C0 2 H, -SO3H, or -P(0) (OH) 2;
  • Rg and R7 are each independently selected form hydrogen and non-interfering substituents, with the non- interfering substituents being selected from the group consisting of the following: C -Cg alkyl, C2 ⁇ C alkenyl, C2 ⁇ C alkynyl, C7-C12 aralkyl, C7-C12 alkaryl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkenyl, phenyl, tolulyl, xylenyl, biphenyl, C]_-Cg alkoxy, C2 ⁇ Cg alkenyloxy, C2 ⁇ C alkynyloxy, C2 ⁇ C 2 alkoxyalkyl, C2 ⁇ C ⁇ 2 alkoxyalkyloxy, C2 _ C 2 alkylcarbonyl, C2-C 2 alkylcarbonylamino, C2-C 2 alkoxyamino, C2 ⁇ C 2 alkoxyaminocarbonyl, C2 ⁇ C
  • Particularly useful prodrugs of the compounds of formula (I) and named compounds (A) thru (0) are the simple aromatic and aliphatic esters, such as the methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, sec-butyl, tert-butyl ester, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester, and morpholino-N-ethyl ester. Methods of making ester prodrugs are disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
  • the aniline, 2, on heating with di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in THF at reflux temperature is converted to the N-tert-butylcarbonyl derivative, 3, in good yield.
  • the dilithium salt of the dianion of 3 is generated at -40 to -20 °C in THF using sec- butyl lithium and reacted with the appropriately substituted N-methoxy-N-methylalkanamide .
  • This product, 4, may be purified by crystallization from hexane, or reacted directly with trifluoroacetic acid in methylene chloride to give the 1, 3-unsubstituted indole 5.
  • the 1, 3-unsubstituted indole 5 is reacted with sodium hydride in dimethylformamide at room temperature (20-25 °C) for 0.5-1.0 hour.
  • the resulting sodium salt of 5 is treated with an equivalent of arylmethyl halide and the mixture stirred at a temperature range of 0-100 °C, usually at ambient room temperature, for a period of 4 to 36 hours to give the 1-arylmethylindole, 6.
  • This indole, 6, is O-demethylated by stirring with boron tribromide in methylene chloride for approximately 5 hours (see ref. Tsung-Ying Shem and Charles A Winter, Adv. Drug Res., 1977, 12, 176, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) .
  • the 4-hydroxyindole, 7, is alkylated with an alpha bromoalkanoic acid ester in dimethylformamide (DMF) using sodium hydride as a base, with reactions conditions similar to that described for the conversion of 5 to 6.
  • the a- [ (indol-4-yl) oxy] alkanoic acid ester, 8, is reacted with oxalyl chloride in methylene chloride to give 9, which is not purified but reacted directly with ammonia to give the glyoxamide 10.
  • This product is hydrolyzed using IN sodium hydroxide in MeOH .
  • the final glyoxylamide, 11, is isolated either as the free carboxylic acid or as its sodium salt or in both forms.
  • This material is dissolved in 250 mL of methylene chloride and 50 mL of trifluoroacetic acid and stirred for a total of 17 hours. The mixture is concentrated at reduced pressure and ethyl acetate and water added to the remaining oil. The ethyl acetate is separated, washed with brine, dried (MgSU4) and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed three times on silica eluting with 20% EtOAc/hexane to give 13.9g of 2-ethyl-4-methoxy-lH- indole .
  • lH-indole-3-hydrazide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in practicing the method of the invention are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,578,634; the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the described as lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazides represented by the formula (lb) , and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and prodrugs thereof; wherein;
  • X is oxygen or sulfur
  • R ⁇ is selected from groups (i), (ii) and (iii) where; (i) is C4-C20 alkyl, C4-C20 alkenyl, C -C20 alkynyl, C -C20 haloalkyl, C4-C 2 cycloalkyl, or
  • (ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C]_-C ⁇ o alkylthio, alkoxy, C_-C ⁇ o alkyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; (iii) is
  • R74 is, independently, hydrogen or C -C o alkyl
  • R75 is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, nitro, phenyl, -SH, C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkylthio, C]_-C ⁇ o alkoxy, C -C o alkyl, amino, hydroxyamino or a substituted or unsubstituted 5- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring;
  • R2 is halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, ethenyl, C ⁇ -C2 alkylthio, C ⁇ -C 2 alkoxy, -CHO, -CN; each R3 is independently hydrogen, C -C3 alkyl, or halo;
  • R4 R5, Rg, and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C ⁇ -C o alkyl, C -C o alkenyl, C -C ⁇ o alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R4 R5, Rg, and R7 combined with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6- membered substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclic ring; or C -C o haloalkyl, C -C o alkoxy, C -C ⁇ haloalkoxy, C4-C8 cycloalkoxy, phenoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxyl, -SH, -CN, -S(C -C ⁇ o alkyl), arylthio, thioacetal, -C (0) 0 (C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkyl), hydrazino,
  • Z is a bond, -0-, -N(C]_-C]_Q alkyl)-, -NH, or -S-;
  • Q is -CON(R 8 2R83) ' -5-tetrazolyl, -SO3H,
  • Rgg is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or C -C ⁇ o alkyl.
  • the lH-indole-3-acetic acid ester can be readily alkylated by an alkyl halide or arylalkyl halide in a solvent such as N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) in the presence of a base (meth a) to give the intermediate l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III.
  • a solvent such as N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF)
  • a base meth a
  • Bases such as potassium t-butoxide and sodium hydride were particularily useful. It is advantageous to react the indole, II, with the base to first form the salt of II and then add the alkylating agent. Most alkylations can be carried out at room temperature.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the compound represented by (lib), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrug derivatives thereof,
  • X is oxygen or sulfur
  • R]_]_ is selected from groups (i), (ii) (iii) and (iv) where;
  • (i) is Cg-C20 alkyl, Cg-C20 alkenyl, Cg-C20 alkynyl, Cg-C20 haloalkyl, C4-C 2 cycloalkyl, or
  • (ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, nitro, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C1-C10 alkyl, C1-C10 alkylthio, C1-C10 alkoxyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; or
  • (iii) is -(CH 2 ) n -(R8 ⁇ ) > or -(NH)-(R 81 ), where n is 1 to 8, and Rgo i a group recited in (i), and Rgi is selected from a group recited in (i) or (ii);
  • R87 is hydrogen or C ⁇ -C o alkyl
  • Rg8 is selected from the group; phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and biphenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C -C o alkylthio, C -C g alkoxyl, phenyl, nitro, C -C g alkyl, C -C g haloalkyl, carboxyl, amino, hydroxyamino; or a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 8 membered heterocyclic ring;
  • R 2 is halo, C]_-C2 alkylthio, or C -C2 alkoxy; each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halo, or methyl;
  • R 14 R 15' R 16' anc R 17 are eac h independently hydrogen, C ⁇ -C ⁇ o alkyl, C ⁇ -C]_Q alkenyl, C -C ⁇ o alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R 4 R15, R 16' anc ⁇ R 17?
  • Z is a bond, -0-, -N(C ⁇ -C ⁇ 0 alkyl)-, -NH-, or -S-;
  • Q is -CON(R82 R 83) ' -5-tetrazolyl, -SO3H, 0
  • R g is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or C -C n alkyl
  • R99 is selected from hydrogen or C -C n alkyl.
  • the lH-indole-3-acetamide II may be alkylated by an alkyl halide or arylalkyl halide in a solvent such as N,N- dimethylformamide (DMF) in the presence of a base (method a) to give intermediate l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III.
  • a solvent such as N,N- dimethylformamide (DMF)
  • a base (method a) to give intermediate l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III.
  • Bases such as potassium t-butoxide and sodium hydride are useful. It is advantageous to react the indole, II, with the base to first form the salt of II and then add alkylating agent.
  • the intermediate acetic acid esters, III can be first hydrolyzed to the acetic acid derivatives, V (method d) , which on treatment with an alkyl chloroformate followed by anhydrous ammonia, also give amides, I (method e) .
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-1-acetamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ic);
  • X is oxygen or sulfur; each R ] _ is independently hydrogen, or C2-C3 alkyl; R3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where;
  • (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents;
  • (c) is the group -(L)-Rgo; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg i a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group), wherein -(L a )-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) ;
  • R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • lH-indole-1-hydrazide compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows : A lH-indole-1-hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (lie); wherein for formula (lie);
  • (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituent; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgn; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgn is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -O- (C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of ltto 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group,
  • R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • Indolizine SPLA2 inhibitors and their method of preparation are described in US Patent Application Serial No. 08/765566, filed July 20, 1995 (titled, "Synovial Phospholipase A2 Inhibitor Compounds Having an Indolizine Type Nucleus, Parmaceutical Formulations Containing Said compounds, and Therapeutic Methods of Using said Compounds"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; and also in European Patent Publication No.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of lH-indole-1-functional compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Id);
  • X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, C -C3 alkyl, or halo;
  • R ⁇ 3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
  • (c) is the group -(L)-Rg ⁇ ; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R ⁇ 2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S- (C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • R 7 and R g are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group), wherein -(L a )-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R 7 and R g must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group); and
  • R 5 and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and hetero
  • (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents;
  • (c) is the group -(L)-Rg ⁇ ; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (C ⁇ -C 2 alkyl), -S- (C ⁇ -C 2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) , wherein -(L a )-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R5 and Rg must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group);
  • R7 and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows :
  • indolizine-1-glyoxylamide functional compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is selected from the group represented by the following formulae:
  • the indolizine compounds may be made by one of more of the following reaction schemes:
  • indolizine 31 Heating a mixture of 3-bromo-4-phenyl-butan-2-one or 3-bromo-4-cyclohexyl-butan-2-one and ethyl pyridine-2- acetate, or a substituted derivative, in the presence of base yields indolizine 31.
  • the hydroxypyridme is O-alkylated to give 44 which is heated with 2-haloketones to produce 45.
  • Treatment of 45 with base causes cyclization to 46 which on heating with acid chlorides yields acylmdolizmes 47 which are reduced by aluminum hydride to the corresponding alkylmdolizines 48.
  • Sequential treatment of 48 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 49.
  • Cleavage of the ether functionality of 49 yields 50.
  • the oxyacetic ester derivatives 51 are formed by O-alkylation of 50 and then hydrolyzed to the oxyacetic acids 52.
  • Ri R 2 a Me o-biphenyl f cyclopentyl o-biphenyl b Et o-biphenyl g Et m-biphenyl c iPr o-biphenyl h Et cinnamyl d cycloPro o-biphenyl i Et phenethyl e tBu o-biphenyl j cyclopropyl 1 -naphthyl k cyclopropyl cyclohexyl
  • Pyridine 43 is O-alkylated to produce 53. Heating 53 with 2-haloketones gives intermediate N-alkylated pyridinium compounds which are cyclized to 54 on treatment with base. Heating 54 with acyl chlorides gives the acylindolizines 55 which are reduced to the alkylindolizines 56 by sodium borohydride-aluminum chloride. Alternatively, 56 are produced by C-alkylation of 54 using alkyl halides. Sequential treatment of 56 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 57 which are hydrolyzed to produce 58. Compound 58b is converted to its sodium salt 59a which yields 59b-k on reaction with the appropriate alkyl halide. Scheme 6e - Part 2
  • Compound 36b is O-alkylated to give 591-p.
  • Pyridine 60 is N-alkylated by 2-haloketones to produce intermediate pyridinium compounds which are cyclized by base to give 61.
  • Reaction of 61 with acyl chlorides produces 62 which are reduced to 63 by tert butylamine-borane and aluminum chloride.
  • Sequential treatment of 63 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia yields 64 which are O-demethylated by BBr3 to give 65.
  • the sodium salt of 65 is reacted with ethyl 4-bromobutyrate to give 66 which is hydrolyzed to the acid 67.
  • Compounds 36d and 65c are O-alkylated by omega- bromocarboxylic esters to give 68 which are hydrolyzed to the acids 69.
  • Compounds 36d and 65c produce 70 on treatment with propiolactone and base.
  • Pyridine 44b reacts with ethyl bromoacetate to produce 72 which is treated with CS2 and base and then with ethyl acrylate to form 73.
  • Reaction of 73 with base and ethyl bromoacetate yields a mixture of regioisomers 74a+b, 6- and 8-benzyloxy compounds.
  • Base treatment of 74a+b eliminates ethyl acrylate to form 75 which is separated from the isomer of 6-benzyloxy derivative and S-alkylated to give 76. Hydrolysis of 76 forms 77 which is thermally decarboxylated to yield 78.
  • Aminopicoline 84 is converted to its N-CBZ derivative 85 whose anion is alkylated by methyl bromoacetate to produce 86.
  • Reaction of 86 with methyl alpha-bromoalkyl ketones in the presence of base yields 87.
  • Sequential treatment of 87 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 88 which is converted to 89 by hydrogenolysis of the N-CBZ function. Hydrolysis of 89 yields acids 90.
  • Pyridine 24 is N-alkylated by methyl bromoacetate, cyclized with base, and o-methylated using dimethysulfate to give 94.
  • Hydrolysis of the ester function of 94 followed by thermal decarboxylation yields 2-methoxy-8- benzyloxyindolizine which is C-alkylated at position 3 and then reacted sequentially with oxalyl chloride and ammonia to produce 95.
  • Hydrogenolysis of the 8-benzyloxy group followed by O-alkylation gives 96 which is hydrolyzed to 97.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of an indene-1-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (If);
  • X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rx is independently hydrogen, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, or halo;
  • R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
  • (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents;
  • (c) is the group -(L)-Rgo' where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S-(C ⁇ -C alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) ; wherein ⁇ (L a )-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group); and R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • Suitable indene compounds also include the following: An indene-1-acetic acid hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ilf);
  • R3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rg Q ,- where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (C -C2 alkyl), -S-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) ; wherein -(L a )-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group); and
  • R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • Suitable indene compounds for use in the method of the invention also include the following:
  • X is oxygen or sulfur
  • R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C -C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgn; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R2 is hydrogen, halo, C ⁇ -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), -S-(C ⁇ -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
  • Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group) ; wherein - ( a )- , is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (L a ) - (acidic group);
  • R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
  • the method of making the indene compounds is as follows:
  • a mixture of an anisaldehyde 1, propionic anhydride, and sodium propionate is heated to produce 2 which is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give 3.
  • Acid cyclization of 3 yields 6.
  • the aromatic position para to the methoxy group of 3 is blocked by bromination to give 4 which is cyclized to 5 by acid and then debrominated using hydrogen and Pd/C to give 6.
  • Reaction of 6 with the anion of triethyl phosphonoacetate produces 7 and/or 8.
  • Radical bromination of 8 gives 9, which on reduction with hydrogen in the presence of Pt ⁇ 2 yields 7.
  • treatment of 8 with acid gives 7
  • Compound 7 is condensed with benzaldehyde and its derivatives in the presence of base to give 10.
  • Indenes 10 are converted to an active ester using benzotriazo-1- yloxytris (dimethylamino) hexafluorophosphonate and then reacted with ammonium hydroxide to form 11.
  • Demethylation of 11 with BBr3 forms 12 which is O-alkylated using sodium hydride and an omega-bromoalkanoic acid ester to produce 13.
  • Aqueous base hydrolysis of 13 yields 14.
  • Compound 12c is O-alkylated using sodium hydride and methylbromoacetate to product 15 which is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give a mixture of isomers 16a and 16b.
  • Aqueous base hydrolysis of 16a and 16b gives 17a and 17b respectively.
  • Compound lOd is treated with lithium diisopropylamine, then air is bubbled into the solution to give 18.
  • the indene 18 is converted to an active ester using benzotriazo- 1-yloxytris (dimethylamino) hexafluorophosphonate and then reacted with ammonium hydroxide to form the hydroxy acetamide 19.
  • Compound 19 is oxidized to 20 using N-methylmorpholine N-oxide in the presence of tetrapropylammonium perruthenate .
  • Carbazole and tetrahydrocarbazole SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making these compounds are set out in United States Patent Application SN 09/063066 filed April 21, 199 ⁇ (titled, "Substituted Carbazoles and 1,2,3,4- Tetrahydrocarbazoles") , the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method of the invention includes treatment of a mammal with these compounds .
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount carbazole or tetrahydrocarbazole represented by the following:
  • A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position; one of B or D is nitrogen and the other is carbon;
  • Z is cyclohexenyl, phenyl, pyridyl, wherein the nitrogen is at the 1-, 2-, or 3-position, or a 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-,
  • R20 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is - (C5-C20) lkyl, - (C 5 -C o) alkenyl,
  • (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents;
  • (c) is the group -(L)-R80; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms selected from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur; wherein the combination of atoms in -(L)- are selected from the group consisting of (i) carbon and hydrogen only, (ii) one sulfur only, (iii) one oxygen only, (iv) one or two nitrogen and hydrogen only, (v) carbon, hydrogen, and one sulfur only, and (vi) and carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen only; and where R ⁇ O is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
  • R ⁇ l is a non-interfering substituent
  • RI' is -NHNH 2 , -NH 2 or -CONH 2 ;
  • R2' is selected from the group consisting of -OH, and
  • R 5 ' is H, -CN, -NH 2 , -CONH 2 , -CONR 9 R 10 -NHS0 2 R 15 ;
  • R 15 is - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl or -CF 3 ; phenyl or phenyl substituted with -CO2H or -CO2 (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl; and - (L a ) - (acidic group), wherein
  • R3 ' is selected from non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radicals, carbocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radicals, and heterocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tauto er, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof; provided that; when R ⁇ ' is H, R ⁇ O ⁇ s benzyl and m is 1 or
  • R 2 ' cannot be -0(CH 2 ) m H; and provided that when D is nitrogen, the heteroatom of Z is selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-, 2- or 3-position and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or
  • Z is cyclohexenyl, or phenyl; R21 is a non-interfering substituent;
  • R 1 is -NHNH2 or -NH 2 ;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and
  • R 5 is H, -C0 H, -CONH2, -C0 2 (C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl); _P(R R ) , here R ⁇ and R ⁇ are each independently -OH or
  • Preferred specific compounds including all salts and prodrug derivatives thereof, for practicing the method of the invention are as follows:
  • R 1 is -NHNH 2 , or -NH 2 ;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and -
  • R 3 is H, -0(C ⁇ -C 4 ) alkyl, halo, - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, phenyl,
  • R 4 is H, - (C5-CX4) alkyl, - (C3-C14 ) cycloalkyl, pyridyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, halo,
  • A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-,
  • Prodrugs are derivatives of SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention which have chemically or metabolically cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo.
  • Derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and base derivative forms, but the acid derivative form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985) .
  • Prodrugs include acid derivatives well known to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acidic compound with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a suitable amine . Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters derived from acidic groups pendent on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy) alkyl esters or ( (alkoxycarbonyl) oxy) alkyl esters.
  • Specific preferred prodrugs are ester prodrugs inclusive of methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, sec-butyl, tert-butyl ester, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester, and morpholino-N-ethyl ester.
  • Methods of making ester prodrugs are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326. Additional methods of prodrug synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
  • 60/063280 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference;
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063646 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Morpholino-N-ethyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference;
  • US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063284 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Isopropyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole SPL 2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Carbazole and tetrahydrocarbazole SPLA2 inhibitor compounds useful for practicing the method of the invention may be made by the following general methods:
  • R 1 is -NH2
  • R 3 (a) is H, -0 (C ⁇ -C ) alkyl, halo, - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C -C4 ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF ; -CH 0Si (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (C ⁇ -Cg) hydroxyalkyl,
  • R 8 is H, -C0NH , -NR 9 R 10 , -CN or phenyl where R 9 and R 10 are independently hydrogen, -CF3, phenyl, - (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl, - (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkylphenyl or -phenyl (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; when R 1 is -NHNH , R 3 (a) is H, -0 (C ⁇ -C ) alkyl, halo,
  • R 8 is H, -NR 9 R 10 , -CN or phenyl where R 9 and R 10 are independently hydrogen, -CF3, phenyl, - (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl, - (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkylphenyl or -phenyl (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8;
  • R 2 (a) is -OCH3 or -OH.
  • An appropriately substituted nitrobenzene (1) can be reduced to the aniline (2) by treatment with a reducing agent, such as hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C, preferably at room temperature.
  • a reducing agent such as hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C, preferably at room temperature.
  • Compound (2) is N-alkylated at temperatures of from about 0 to 20 °C using an alkylating agent such as an appropriately substituted aldehyde and sodium cyanoborohydride to form (3) .
  • an appropriately substituted benzyl halide may be used for the first alkylation step.
  • the resulting intermediate is further N-alkylated by treatment with 2-carbethoxy-6- bromocyclohexanone, preferably at temperatures of about
  • the product (4) is cyclized to the tetrahydrocarbazole (5) by refluxing with ZnCl2 in benzene for from about 1 to 2 days, preferably at 80 °C. (Ref 1) .
  • Compound (5) is converted to the hydrazide (6) by treatment with hydrazine at temperatures of about 100 °C, or to the amide (7) by reacting with methylchloroaluminum amide in benzene.
  • (7) may be produced by treatment of (6) with Raney nickel active catalyst .
  • Compounds (6) and (7) may be dealkylated, preferably at 0 °C to room temperature, with a dealkylating agent, such as boron tribromide or sodium thioethoxide, to give compound (7) where R 2 (a) is -OH, which may then be further converted to compound (9), by realkylating with a base, such as sodium hydride, and an alkylating agent, such as Br(CH2) R ⁇ , where R ⁇ is the carboxylate or phosphonic diester or nitrile as defined above. Conversion of R 2 to the carboxylic acid may be accomplished by treatment with an aqueous base.
  • a dealkylating agent such as boron tribromide or sodium thioethoxide
  • R 2 When R 2 is nitrile, conversion to the tetrazole may be achieved by reacting with tri-butyl tin azide or conversion to the carboxamide may be achieved by reacting with basic hydrogen peroxide.
  • R 2 When R 2 is the phosphonic diester, conversion to the acid may be achieved by reacting with a dealkylating agent such as trimethylsilyl bromide. The monoester may be accomplished by reacting the diester with an aqueous base.
  • R 2 and R 3 are both methoxy, selective demethylation can be achieved by treating with sodium ethanethiolate in dimethylformamide at 100 °C.
  • R 3a is as defined in Scheme 1, above
  • the aniline (2) is N-alkylated with 2-carbethoxy- 6-bromocyclohexanone in dimethyl formamide in the presence of sodium bicarbonate for 8-24 hours at 50 °C .
  • Preferred protecting groups include methyl, carbonate, and silyl groups, such as t-butyldimethylsilyl .
  • the reaction product (4') is cyclized to (5') using the ZnCl2 in benzene conditions described in Scheme 1(a), above.
  • N-alkylation of (5') to yield (5) is accomplished by treatment with sodium hydride and the appropriate alkyl halide in dimethylformamide at room temperature for 4-8 hours.
  • R 3(a) is as defined in Scheme Ic
  • carbazole (5) is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid (10) by treatment with an aqueous base, preferably at room temperature to about 100 °C .
  • the intermediate is then converted to an acid chloride utilizing, for example, oxalyl chloride and dimethylformamide, and then further reacted with a lithium, salt of (S) or (R) -4-alkyl-2-oxazolidine at a temperature of about -75 °C, to give (11a) and (lib), which are separable by chromatography.
  • the diastereomers are converted to the corresponding enantiomeric benzyl esters (12) by brief treatment at temperatures of about 0 °C to room temperature with lithium benzyl oxide.
  • the esters (12) are then converted to (7) preferably by treatment with methylchloroaluminum amide (Ref 2, above) or, alternately, by hydrogenation using, for example, hydrogen and palladium on carbon, as described above, to make the acid and then reacting with an acyl azide, such as diphenylphosphoryl azide followed by treatment with ammonia.
  • an acyl azide such as diphenylphosphoryl azide followed by treatment with ammonia.
  • a 1, 2 , 3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide or 4-carboxhydrazide (13) is dehydrogenated by refluxing in a solvent such as carbitol in the presence of Pd/C to produce the carbazole-4-carboxamide .
  • a solvent such as carbitol
  • Pd/C a solvent such as Pd/C
  • carbazole-4-carboxamide a solvent such as carbitol
  • treatment of (13) with DDQ in an appropriate solvent such as dioxane yields carbozole (14).
  • oxidation as described above may result in de-alkylation of the nitrogen.
  • R 3 is substituted at the 8- position with methyl
  • oxidation results in dealkylation of the nitrogen which may be realkylated by treatment with sodium hydride and the appropriate alkyl halide as described in Scheme I (a) above to prepare the deired product (14 ) .
  • Benzoic acid derivative (16) where X is preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine and the protecting group is preferably -CH3, are reduced to the corresponding aniline (25) with a reducing agent, such as stannous chloride in the presence of acid under the general conditions of Sakamoto et al, Chem Pharm. Bull. 35 (5), 1823-1828 (1987).
  • a reducing agent such as stannous chloride
  • a noninterfering solvent preferably ethyl acetate
  • the reactions are conducted at temperatures from about 0 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and are substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions .
  • the aniline (25) and dione (15) are condensed under dehydrating conditions, for example, using the general procedure of Iida, et al., (Ref 5), with or without a noninterfering solvent, such as toluene, benzene, or methylene chloride, under dehydrating conditions at a temperature about 10 to 150 °C .
  • a noninterfering solvent such as toluene, benzene, or methylene chloride
  • the water formed in the process can be removed by distillation, azetropic removal via a Dean-Stark apparatus, or the addition of a drying agent, such as molecular sieves, magnesium sulfate, calcium carbonate, sodium sulfate, and the like.
  • the process can be performed with or without a catalytic amount of an acid, such a p-toluenesulfonic acid or methanesulfonic acid.
  • suitable catalysts include hydrochloric acid, phenylsulfonic acid, calcium chloride, and acetic acid.
  • suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, methanol, ethanol, 1,1,2,2- tetrachloroethane, chlorobenzene, bromobenzene, xylenes, and carbotetrachloride .
  • the condensation of the instant process is preferably carried out neat, at a temperature about 100 to 150 °C with the resultant water removed by distillation via a stream of inert gas, such as, nitrogen or argon.
  • the reaction is substantially complete in about 30 minutes to 24 hours.
  • Intermediate (26) may then be readily cyclized in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(0Ac)2 or Pd(PPh3)4 and the like, a phosphine, preferably a trialkyl- or triarylphosphine, such as triphenylphosphine, tri-o- tolylphosphine , or tricyclohexylphosphine, and the like, a base, such as, sodium bicarbonate, triethylamine, or diisopropylethylamine, in a noninterfering solvent, such as, acetonitrile, triethylamine, or toluene at a temperature about 25 to 200°C to form (19) .
  • a noninterfering solvent such as, acetonitrile, triethylamine, or toluene at a temperature about 25 to 200°C to form (19) .
  • suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, benzen
  • Examples of other suitable palladium catalysts include Pd(PPh 3 )Cl 2 , Pd(OCOCF 3 ) 2 , [ (CH 3 C 6 H ) 3 P] 2 PdCl2, [ (CH 3 CH 2 )3P]2PdCl2, [ (C 6 H ⁇ ) 3 P] 2 PdCl 2 , and [ (C 6 H 5 ) 3 P] 2 PdBr 2 •
  • Examples of other suitable phosphines include triisopropylphosphine, triethylphosphine, tricyclopentylphosphine, 1, 2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethane, 1, 3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, and 1,4- bis (diphenylphosphino) butane .
  • Examples of other suitable bases include tripropyl amine, 2, 2, 6, 6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1,5- diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) , 1,8- diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene (DBU), 1,5- diazabicyclo [4.3.0] non-5-ene, (DBN) sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, and potassium bicarbonate.
  • DABCO diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane
  • DBU 1,8- diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene
  • DBN 1,5- diazabicyclo [4.3.0] non-5-ene
  • the cyclization of the instant process is preferably carried out with palladium (II ) acetate as catalyst in the presence of either triphenylphosphine, tri-o- tolylphosphine, 1, 3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, or tricyclohexylphosphine in acetonitrile as solvent and triethylamine as base at a temperature about 50 to 150 °C .
  • the reaction is substantially complete in about 1 hour to 14 days.
  • a preferred process for cyclization consists of the reaction of intermediate (26) with a palladacycle catalyst such as trans-di ( ⁇ -acetato) -bis [ o- (di- o-tolylphosphino) benzyl] dipalladium (II) in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide (DMAC) at 120-140 °C in the presence of a base such as sodium acetate.
  • a palladacycle catalyst such as trans-di ( ⁇ -acetato) -bis [ o- (di- o-tolylphosphino) benzyl] dipalladium (II) in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide (DMAC) at 120-140 °C in the presence of a base such as sodium acetate.
  • Intermediate (19) may be alkylated with an alkylating agent XCH2R4, where X is halo in the presence of a base to form (20) .
  • Suitable bases include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lithium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, lithium hydride, and Triton B (N-benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) .
  • the reaction may or may not be carried out in the presence of a crown ether. Potassium carbonate and Triton B are preferred.
  • the amount of alkylating agent is not critical, however, the reaction is best accomplished using an excess of alkyl halide relative to the starting material.
  • a catalytic amount of an iodide such as sodium iodide or lithium iodide may or may not be added to the reaction mixture.
  • the reaction is preferably carried out in an organic solvent, such as, acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, or acetonitrile.
  • organic solvents include tetrahydrofuran, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether.
  • the reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
  • a phase transfer reagent such as tetrabutylammonium bromide or tetrabutylammonium chloride may be employed.
  • Suitable solvents include methylene chloride, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, diethyl ether, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether. Toluene, benzene, dioxane, and tetrahydrofuran are preferred solvents.
  • the reaction is carried out at a temperature about 0 to 120 °C . Temperatures from 50 to 120 °C are preferred. The reaction is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions .
  • Intermediate (21) may be aminated with ammonia in the presence of a noninterfering solvent to form a (22) .
  • Ammonia may be in the form of ammonia gas or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium hydroxide, ammonium acetate, ammonium trifluoroacetate, ammonium chloride, and the like.
  • Suitable solvents include ethanol, methanol, propanol, butanol, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and water.
  • a mixture of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide and tetrahydrofuran or methanol is preferred for the instant process.
  • the reaction is carried out at a temperature about 20 to 100 °C . Temperatures from 50 to 60 °C are preferred.
  • the reaction is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions .
  • Alkylation of (22) is achieved by treatment with an alkylating agent of the formula XCH2R ⁇ where X is halo and R 70 is -CO2R 71 , -SO3R 71 , -P (0) (OR 71 ) 2 , or -P (0) (OR 71 ) H, where R 71 is an acid protecting group or a prodrug function, in the presence of a base in a noninterfering solvent to form (23) .
  • Methyl bromoacetate and t-butyl bromoacetate are the preferred alkylating agents.
  • Suitable bases include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lithium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, lithium hydride, and Triton B (N-benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) .
  • the reaction may or may not be carried out in the presence of a crown ether. Cesium carbonate and Triton B are preferred.
  • the amount of alkylating agent is not critical, however, the reaction is best accomplished using an excess of alkyl halide relative to the starting material.
  • the reaction is preferably carried out in an organic solvent, such as, acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, or acetonitrile.
  • organic solvents include tetrahydrofuran, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether .
  • reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
  • a phase transfer reagent such as tetrabutylammonium bromide or tetrabutylammonium chloride may be employed.
  • Intermediate (23) may be optionally hydrolyzed with a base or acid to form desired product (24) and optionally salified.
  • Hydrolysis of (23) is achieved using a base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, aqueous potassium carbonate, aqueous sodium carbonate, aqueous lithium carbonate, aqueous potassium bicarbonate, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, aqueous lithium bicarbonate, preferably sodium hydroxide and a lower alcohol solvent, such as, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and the like.
  • a base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, aqueous potassium carbonate, aqueous sodium carbonate, aqueous lithium carbonate, aqueous potassium bicarbonate, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, aqueous lithium bicarbonate, preferably sodium hydroxide and a lower alcohol solvent, such as, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and the like.
  • a lower alcohol solvent such as, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and the like.
  • suitable solvents include
  • the acid protecting group may be removed by organic and inorganic acids, such as trifluoroacetic acid and hydrochloric acid with or without a noninterferring solvent.
  • Suitable solvents include methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and acetone.
  • the t-butyl esters are preferably removed by neat trifluoroacetic acid.
  • the reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100°C. preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
  • the preferred alkyl halide is methyl iodide.
  • the reaction is conducted at temperatures from about 0 to 100°C. preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
  • the starting material (16) may be prepared by condensation with an alcohol HOPG, where PG is an acid protecting group, in the presence of a dehydrating catalyst such as, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or carbonyl diimidazole .
  • a dehydrating catalyst such as, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or carbonyl diimidazole .
  • DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • Kokai Tokkyo Koho 05286912, Nov 1993 Hesei teach a method for preparing 2-fluoro-5-methoxyaniline derivatives.
  • R is as defined in Scheme I ⁇ Ig(b), R3 ( a ) ⁇ s as defined in Scheme Ig(a), above; and X is halo.
  • a palladium catalyst such as Pd(Ph3P)4
  • a base such as sodium bicarbonate
  • Compound (28) is converted to the carbazole product (29) by treatment with a trialkyl or triaryl phosphite or phosphine, such as, triethylphosphite or triphenyl phosphine, according to the general procedure of Cadogan, et al . (Ref 6) .
  • a trialkyl or triaryl phosphite or phosphine such as, triethylphosphite or triphenyl phosphine
  • Compound (29) is N-alkylated with an appropriately substituted alkyl or aryl halide XCH2R ⁇ in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, in a noninterfering solvent, such as toluene, dimethylformamide, or dimethylsulfoxide to afford carbazole (30) .
  • a base such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate
  • a noninterfering solvent such as toluene, dimethylformamide, or dimethylsulfoxide
  • Compound (30) is converted to the corresponding amide (22) by treatment with boron tribromide or sodium thioethoxide, followed by ammonia or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium acetate, in an inert solvent, such as water or alcohol, or with methylchloroalummum amide in an inert solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature between 0 to 110 °C.
  • an inert solvent such as water or alcohol
  • methylchloroalummum amide in an inert solvent, such as toluene
  • Conversion to the desired prodrug may be accomplished by techniques known to the skilled artisan, such as for example, by treatment with a primary or secondary halide to make an ester prodrug.
  • aprotic solvent preferably tetrahydrofuran
  • reduction of (40) is achieved using a reducing agent such as aluminum trihydride.
  • a reducing agent such as aluminum trihydride.
  • the reaction is conducted under inert atmosphere such as nitrogen, at room temperature.
  • intermediate (50) prepared as described in Scheme 1(a) above, is first activated with an activating agent such as carbonyl diimidazole.
  • the reaction is preferably run in an aprotic polar or non-polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran.
  • Acylation with the activated intermediate is accomplished by reacting with H2NSOR 1 ⁇ l in the presence of a base, preferably diazabicycloundecene .
  • PG is an acid protecting group
  • R 22 is (C ⁇ -C 6 ) alkoxy (C ⁇ -C 6 ) alkyl is (Cl-C 6 ) alkoxy (C ⁇ -Cg) alkenyl
  • Starting material (20) is O-alkylated with an alkyl halide or alkenyl halide, using a base such as NaH, in an aprotic polar solvent preferably anhydrous DMF, at ambient temperature under a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • a base such as NaH
  • an aprotic polar solvent preferably anhydrous DMF
  • the process of aromatization from a cyclohexenone functionality to a phenol functionality can be performed by treating the tetrahydrocabazole intermediate (60) with a base such as NaH in the presence of methyl benzenesulfinate in an anhydrous solvent, such as 1,4-dioxane or DMF, to form the ketosulfoxide derivative.
  • the ketosulfoxide derivative (60) is converted to the phenol derivative (61) .
  • Conversion of the ester (61) to the amide (62) can be achieved by treating a solution of (61) in an aprotic polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran with . ammonia gas.
  • Phenolic O-alkylation of (62) with, for example, methyl bromoacetate can be carried out in anhydrous DMF at ambient temperature using CS2CO3 or K2CO3 as a base to form (63) .
  • Desired product (64) can be derived from the basic hydrolysis of ester (63) using LiOH or NaOH as a base in an H2O/CH3OH/THF solution at 50 °C for 1-2 hours.
  • R 22 is - (C ⁇ -C ⁇ ) alkoxy (C ⁇ -C 6 ) alkenyl
  • hydrogenation of the double bond can be performed by treating (63) in THF using Pt ⁇ 2 as a catalysis under a hydrogen atmosphere. Desired product can then be derived as described above in Scheme III (g) from the basic hydrolysis of ester (63) using LiOH or NaOH as a base in an H 2 0/CH 3 OH/THF solution at 50°C for 1-2 hours.
  • R (a) is H, -0(C ⁇ -C4) alkyl, halo, - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C ⁇ -C ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (C ⁇ Cg) alkyl, halo or -CF 3 ; -CH 2 OSi (C ⁇ -C 6 ) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (C ⁇ -Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2) n R ⁇ where R 8 is H, -NR 9 R 10 , -CN or phenyl where R 9 and R 10 are independently - (C ⁇ -C ) alkyl or -phenyl (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8;
  • An indole-3-acetic ester (101) , Ref 10 is alkylated by treatment with alkalai metal amide and benzyloxymethyl chloride to give
  • the alcohol is alkylated to provide the formaldehyde acetal (104) which is cyclized by Lewis acid to produce the pyrano [3, 4-b] indole (105).
  • the ester is converted to the amide (106) by methylchloroaluminum amide, and then to the phenol (107) with boron tribromide.
  • the phenol is O-alkylated to give (108) which is hydrolyzed to the acid (109) .
  • W is halo, alkyl or aryl sulfonyl
  • R 3 (a) is H, -0(C ⁇ -C 4 )alkyl, halo, - (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C ⁇ -C ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (C ⁇ -Cg) lkyl, halo or -CF 3 ; -CH 2 OSi (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (C ⁇ -Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2) n R ⁇ where R 8 is H, -NR 9 R 10 , -CN or phenyl where R 9 and R ⁇ -0 are independently - (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl or -phenyl (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8;
  • 4-Methoxyindole (117) is converted to the indole acetic acid derivative (118) by alkylation with an epoxy propionate.
  • Treatment of (118) with a brominating reagent affords the mixture of bromo isomers (119) and (120) which give the spiro compound (121) upon basic treatment.
  • Heating (121) with benzyl bromide provides a mixture of the isomeric bromo compounds (122) and (123) which react with potassium thioacetate to give a mixture of isomers from which (124) may be separated.
  • Solvolysis of the thioester produces the thiol (125) which is alkylated to give (126) .
  • Lewis acids convert (126) to the thiopyrano [3, 4-b] indole (127).
  • the ester function is converted to amide using methylchloroaluminum amide, the methyl ether cleaved by boron tribromide, and the product phenol O-alkylated with bromoacetic ester to give (130) which is hydrolyzed to (131) .
  • X is halo
  • R 3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) above;
  • R is - (CH 2 )mR 5 .
  • Alkylation of the indole-nitrogen can then be achieved by reacting (134) with a suitable alkyl halide in the presence of potassium bis (trimethylsilyl ) amide to prepare ( 135 ) .
  • the ester functionality of (135) is converted to a trimethylsilylketene acetal (136) by treatment with potassium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide and trimethylsilyl chloride.
  • Treatment of the ketene acetal (136) with bis (chloromethyl) sulfide and zinc bromide in methylene chloride affords the cyclized product (137) .
  • Conversion to amide (138) can be accomplished by a Weinreb reaction with methylchloroaluminum amide.
  • N-alkylation of commercially available 4-methoxy indole (231) under basic conditions using an alkyl halide affords the N-alkyl indole (232) .
  • Acylation with a suitable acid chloride provides the glyoxalate ester product (233) which can be reduced with a variety of hydride reducing agents to give intermediate alcohols (234) .
  • Conversion of the alcohol to a suitable leaving group and displacement with sulfur nucleophiles affords the thioether product (235) .
  • Conversion to the acid chloride and spontaneous cyclization affords the thioketone product (236) .
  • Cleavage of the ester can be effected under basic conditions to give the correponding acid which upon formation of the acid chloride and reaction with an appropriate amine gives the amide product (237) .
  • Cleavage of the methyl ether gives the phenol (238) which can be alkylated under basic conditions using alkyl halides to give the O-alkylated product (239) .
  • Cleavage of the ester under basic conditions gives the desired product (240) .
  • reduction of the benzylic ketone with a hydride reducing agent and subsequent deoxygenation of the resulting alcohol gives the deoxygenated product (244) .
  • Cleavage of the oxyacetic ester proceeds under basic conditions to give the desired oxyacetic acid (242) .
  • Substituted haloaniline (145) is condensed with N-benzyl-3- piperidone to provide enamine (146). Ring closure is effected by treatment of (146) with palladium (II) acetate and the resultant product is converted to (147) by treatment with cyanogen bromide. Alkylation of (147) is accomplished by treatment with the appropriate alkyl bromide using sodium hydride as base. Hydrolysis of this N-alkylated product with basic hydrogen peroxide under standard conditions provides (148). Demethylation of (148) is carried out by treatment with boron tribromide in methylene chloride .
  • the resulting phenol (149) is converted by the standard sequence of O-alkylation with methyl bromoacetate in the presence of a base, hydrolysis with hydroxide to provide the intermediate salt which is then protonated in aqueous acid to provide desired ⁇ -carboline (150) .
  • X is halo
  • R 3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) .
  • Ketene acetal (136), prepared as described in Scheme IV (d), is reacted with benzyl bis (methoxymethyl) amine in the presence of zinc chloride to give the tetrahydro- beta-carboline (151).
  • amide (152) (R ⁇ O is ⁇ t-butyldimethylsilyl) which is desilylated with tetra-n- butylammonium fluoride and alkylated with, for example, ethyl bromoacetate to give ester (153) .
  • Lithium hydroxide-mediated hydrolysis gives acid (154), which may be hydrogenated over an appropriate catalyst in the presence of hydrochloride acid to give the tetrahydro- beta-carboline as the hydrochloride salt (155).
  • (155) may in turn be aromatized by refluxing in carbitol with palladium on carbon to provide beta-carboline (156) .
  • X is halo, R is as defined in Scheme IV (d); and R 3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) .
  • indole (133) is successively treated with one equivalent n-butyllithium, carbon dioxide gas, one equivalent of t_-butyllithium, and l-dimethylamino-2-nitroethene to give (157).
  • Nitroalkene (157) is reduced with lithium aluminum hydride to amine (158), which is cyclized with methyl glyoxylate (Ref. 9) in refluxing ethanol to give tetrahydrocarboline (159).
  • Alkylation of both nitrogens of (159) leads to intermediate (160), which is treated with the appropriate Weinreb reagent to provide amide (161) .
  • ester (162) Fluoride-assisted desilylation and alkylation with, for example, ethyl iodoacetate gives ester (162), which may be hydrogenated over a suitable catalyst and base-hydrolyzed to give acid (163) .
  • Aromatization of (163) to carboline (164) is achieved by refluxing in carbitol in the presence of palladium-on-carbon .
  • the commercially available acid (170) is reduced with lithium aluminum hydride, oxidized with pyridinium chlorochromate, and silylated with t ⁇ -butyldimethylsilyl chloride to give (171) .
  • Treatment with sodium azide provides azide (172), which is reacted with nitromethane and potassium hydroxide in ethanol, followed by treatment with acetic anhydride and pyridine to give nitroolefin (173) .
  • Heating in xylene induces cyclization to produce indole (174) .
  • Alkylation with, for example, benzyl iodide and sodium hydride gives (175), which is hydrogenated in the presence of palladium-on-carbon to give amine (176) .
  • amine (179) may be aromatized by refluxing in carbitol or some other suitable high boiling solvent to give alpha-carboline (183), which is converted via the appropriate Weinreb reagent to amide (184) .
  • X is halo
  • Scheme V(e) provides ⁇ -carboline (198) by the indicated sequence of reactions.
  • N-alkylation of 2-carboethoxyindole (190) followed by a standard two carbon homologation sequence provides 2- (3-propenoic acid) indoles (194).
  • the condensation of aldehyde (193) with malonic acid utilized a mixture of pyridine and piperidine as the base.
  • ring closure (196) was effected by treatment with bis (2, 2, 2-trichloroethyl) azodicarboxylate (BTCEAD) followed by zinc in acetic acid. Reduction of the cyclic amide with lithium aluminum hydride followed by treatment with trimethylsilylisocyanate provided the urea (197). Conversion to the desired d-carboline (198) was accomplished under the usual conditions of demethylation and subsequent alkylation and ester hydrolysis steps.
  • BTCEAD bis (2, 2, 2-trichloroethyl) azodicarboxylate
  • Reverse indoles i.e., compounds where B is carbon and D is nitrogen can be prepared as described in Scheme VIg, below.
  • Aryl hydrazines (200) are condensed with substituted prpionaldehydes to form hydrazones which are cyclized to indoles (201) by treatment with phosphorous trichloride at room temperature (Ref 1) .
  • the indoles are N-alkylated on reaction with a base such as sodium hydride and an alph-bromo ester to give indoles (202) which are cyclized to tetrahydrocarbazoles (203) by Lewis acids (e.g., aluminum chloride) or by radical initiators (e.g., tributyltin hydride) .
  • Lewis acids e.g., aluminum chloride
  • radical initiators e.g., tributyltin hydride
  • Compounds (203) can be converted to carbazoles by, for example, refluxing in a solvent such as carbitol in the presence of Pd/C.
  • X is halo and R is (CH 2 ) m R 5 .
  • Commercially available 4-chloroindole (210) is treated with 3 equivalents of t_-butyllithium followed by carbon dioxide, 1 equivalent of n-butyllithium, l-dimethylamino-2-nitroethene, and acid to provide carboxylic acid (211), which may be esterified to give (212) .
  • Alkylation at the 1-position followed by hydrogenation provides aminoethyl indole (214) .
  • Cyclization with phosgene to (215) followed by aromatization gives carboline (216) .
  • Treatment of (216) with the appropriate Weinreb reagent provides amide (217), which may be alkylated with, for example, ethyl bromoacetate and saponified with sodium hydroxide to give the carboline (218) .
  • R3(a) is as defined in Scheme 1(a) , X is halo, and R is (CH )mR 5 .
  • the 1,3-dione structures (228) are either commercially available or readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials.
  • a reducing agent such as SnCl2 in hydrochloric acid in an inert solvent such as ethanol
  • hydrogenation using hydrogen gas and sulfided platinum or carbon or palladium on carbon The amino group of (228) is protected with an appropriate protecting group, such as the, carboethoxyl, benzyl, CBZ
  • the dione (228) and aniline derivative (220) are condensed according to the general procedure of Chen, et al . , (Ref 10) or Yang, et al . , (Ref 11), with or without a noninterfering solvent, such as methanol, toluene, or methylene chloride, with or without an acid, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid or trifluoroacetic acid, with or without N-chlorosuccinimide and dimethyl sulfide, to afford the coupled product (221) .
  • a noninterfering solvent such as methanol, toluene, or methylene chloride
  • an acid such as p-toluenesulfonic acid or trifluoroacetic acid
  • N-chlorosuccinimide and dimethyl sulfide to afford the coupled product (221) .
  • Compound (221) is cyclized under basic conditions with a copper (I) salt in an inert solvent according to the general procedure of Yang, et al . , (Reft ⁇ ) .
  • the derivative (221) is treated with a base, such as sodium hydride, in an inert solvent, such as HMPA, at a temperature between 0 and 25 °C .
  • a copper (I) salt, such as copper (I) iodide is added and the resultant mixture stirred at a temperature between 25 and 150 °C for 1 to 48 hours to afford compound (222) .
  • Compound (221) may also be cyclized according to the general procedure of Chen, et al . , (Ref 10) .
  • the derivative (221) is treated with a base, such as sodium bicarbonate, and a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(PPh3)4, in an inert solvent, such as HMPA, at a temperature between 25 and 150 °C to afford compound (222) .
  • a base such as sodium bicarbonate
  • a palladium catalyst such as Pd(PPh3)4
  • an inert solvent such as HMPA
  • intermediate (171) is treated with a transition metal catalyst, such as Pd (OAc) 2 (O-tol) 3P in the presence of a base such as triethylamine using a cosolvent of DMF/acetonitrile to prepare (222 ) .
  • a transition metal catalyst such as Pd (OAc) 2 (O-tol) 3P
  • OAc Pd
  • O-tol O-tol
  • a base such as triethylamine
  • Compound (222) is N-alkylated with an appropriately substituted benzyl halide in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, in a noninterfering solvent, such as dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide to afford ketone (223) .
  • a base such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate
  • a noninterfering solvent such as dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide to afford ketone (223) .
  • one pot process (222) is aromatized by treatment with acetic acid and palladium on carbon in a noninterfering solvent, such as carbitol or cymene, followed by treatment with hydrogen gas and palladium on carbon to cleave the nitrogen protecting group and produce the phenolic derivative (224) .
  • the ester (224) is converted to the corresponding amide (225) under standard conditions with ammonia (preferably) or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium acetate, in an inert solvent, such as water or alcohol, preferably methanol, or with MeClAlNH2 in an inert solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature between 0 to 110 °C .
  • an inert solvent such as water or alcohol, preferably methanol
  • MeClAlNH2 in an inert solvent, such as toluene
  • Alkylation of the phenolic oxygen of compound 38 with an appropriate haloester, such as methyl bromoacetate, in the presence of a base, such as cesium carbonate, potassium or sodium carbonate, in an inert solvent, such as dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide affords the ester-amide (226) .
  • haloesters such as ethyl bromoacetate, propyl bromoacetate, butyl bromoacetate, and the like can also be used to prepare the corresponding esters.
  • Saponification of compound (226), with lithium hydroxide in an inert solvent, such as methanol-water affords (227).
  • the intermediate and final products may isolated and purified by conventional techniques such as chromatography or recrystallization . Regioisomeric products and intermediates can be separated by standard methods, such as, recrystallization or chromatography. References :
  • the method of the invention may be practiced using pyrazole SPLA2 inhibitors, which are described (together with the method of making) in US Patent Application
  • R-L is phenyl, isoquinolin-3-yl, pyrazinyl, pyridin-2- yl, pyridin-2-yl substituted at the 4-position with - (C1-C4) alkyl, (C ⁇ -C ) alkoxyl, -CN or -(CH 2 )n c ONH 2 where n is 0-2;
  • R2 is phenyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4) alkyl, -CN, halo, -N0 2 , C0 2 (C ⁇ -C 4 ) alkyl and -CF3; naphthyl; thiophene or thiophene substituted with 1 to 3 halo groups;
  • R 3 is hydrogen; phenyl; phenyl (C2-C5) alkenyl; pyridyl; naphthyl; quinolinyl; (C1-C ) alkylthiazolyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4) alkyl, -CN, -CONH 2 , -N0 2 , -CF3, halo,
  • R" is cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl, or phenyl substituted with halo or (C1-C4) alkoxy; or phenyl substituted with two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached form a methylenedioxy ring; and m is 1 to 5; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • pyrazole type SPLA2 inhibitors as follows :
  • R2 is phenyl substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, -CN, halo, -NO2, C0 2 (C ⁇ -C4) alkyl and -CF3; and
  • R3 is phenyl; phenyl (C2 ⁇ Cg) alkenyl; phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, -CN, -CONH 2 , -NO2 , -CF3, halo, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, CO2 (C1-C4 ) alkyl, phenoxy and SR4 where R 4 is - (C]_-C4 ) alkyl or halo phenyl; phenyl substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of -0(CH2)pR ⁇ where p is 1 to 3 and R 5 is -CN, -CO2H, -CONH2 or tetrazolyl, phenyl and -OR 6 where R 6 is cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl or phenyl substituted with halo or (C -C4 ) alk
  • pyrazole type SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows: Compounds selected from the group consisting of 3-(2-chloro- 6-methylphenylsulfonylamino) -4- (2- (4-acetamido) pyridyl) -5- (3- (4-fluorophenoxy) benzylthio) -( IH) -pyrazole and 3- (2, 6- dichlorophenylsulfonylamino) -4- (2- (4-acetamido) pyridyl) -5- (3- (4-fluorophenoxy) benzylthio) - (IH) -pyrazole .
  • L is a leaving group
  • an acetonitrile compound (1) is deprotonated by treatment with an excess of a strong base, such as sodium hydride, preferably under an inert gas, such as nitrogen.
  • a strong base such as sodium hydride
  • the deprotonated intermediate is treated with carbon disulfide and then alkylated twice with an appropriately substituted alkyl halide (2) of the formula R 3 (CH2) , where L is a leaving group, preferably bromine, and R 3 and m are as defined above, to prepare intermediate compound (3) .
  • the reaction is conducted at ambient temperatures and is substantially complete in 1 to 24 hours. Cyclization to form the amino substituted pyrazole (4) is achieved by reacting intermediate (3) with hydrazine at room temperature for from about 1 to 24 hours.
  • Selective sulfonylation of the amino group of intermediate (4) can be accomplished by treatment with a sulfonyl chloride (5) of the formula R2s ⁇ 2Cl, where R ⁇ is as defined above, to prepare product (6) .
  • the reaction is preferably conducted in a solvent, such as pyridine, at ambient temperature for a period of time of from 1 to 24 hours.
  • Preparation of 2 , 6-dimethylphenylsulfonyl chloride can be accomplished as described in J. Org . Chem. 25, 1996 (1960) . All other sulfonyl chlorides are commercially available .
  • Phenyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/979446, filed November 24, 1997 (titled, Phenyl Glyoxamides as SPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a phenyl glyoxamide type sPLA.2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows:
  • X is -0- or -(CH2) m -, where m is 0 or 1; Y is -CO2-, -PO3-, -SO3-; R is independently -H or - (C1-C4 ) alkyl; R! and R 2 are each independently -H, halo or - (C1-C4) alkyl;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently -H, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C -C4 ) alkoxy, (C ⁇ -C4 ) alkylthio, halo, phenyl or phenyl substituted with halo; n is 1-8; and p is 1 when Y is -CO2- or -SO3- and 1 or 2 when Y is -PO3-; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a specific suitable phenyl glyoxamide type sPL .2 inhibitors is 2- ( 4-carboxybut-l-yl-oxy) -4- (3-phenylphenoxy) - phenylglyoxamide .
  • R' is -(C 1 -C4)alkyl
  • compound (2) is internally cyclized to form compound (3) .
  • the reaction is preferably conducted at temperatures from about 0 °C to room temperature and allowed to proceed for about 24 hours.
  • Aminolysis of (3) to amide (4) can be achieved by treatment with concentrated ammonium hydroxide.
  • Alkylation of the hydroxyl of compound (4) can be readily achieved by treatment with an appropriate alkylating agent, such as Br(CH2) n Y, where Y is -CO2R, -PO3R2 or SO3R and R is - (C -C4 ) alkyl, to form intermediate (5) .
  • the reaction is preferably conducted in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl formamide, in the presence of potassium carbonate and a suitable catalyst, such as potassium iodide.
  • Conversion of (5) to the carboxylic or sulfonic acid or acid salt (6) may be achieved by treatment with an appropriate base, such as aqueous sodium hydroxide, in a polar protic solvent, such as methanol.
  • an appropriate base such as aqueous sodium hydroxide
  • a polar protic solvent such as methanol
  • a bromoacetal When n is 2, a bromoacetal must be employed as an alkylating agent to achieve the carboxylic acid (6) .
  • the alkylated moiety (5) is then converted to the acid (6) by oxidizing with sodium dichromatate in aqueous conditions.
  • Y is -P ⁇ 3_, conversion to the acid (6), is preferably conducted in an alkyl halide solvent, such as methylene chloride, using a dealkylating agent, such as trimethylsilyl bromide, and an excess of potassium carbonate, followed by treatment with methanol.
  • R' is as defined in Scheme Ii.
  • An appropriately R ⁇ , R 2 substituted phenol (7) is converted to lactone (8) following the procedures described in Scheme Ii, steps (a-b) above.
  • Conversion to the intermediate (9) is accomplished by reacting (2a) with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid which affords removal of aluminum chloride from the reaction.
  • Acid (9) is converted to the corresponding acid chloride using oxalyl chloride with dimethyl formamide as a catalyst.
  • the acid chloride is recyclized to the lactone (10) on removal of the solvent, preferably under vacuum.
  • the lactone (10) is converted to the glyoxamide (11) by treatment with an excess of ammonia as described in Schemetl, step (c) , above.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention as follows:
  • a compound of the formula (Ij) is useful in the method of the invention as follows:
  • Ri is hydrogen, (C1-C4 ) alkyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C -C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C -C4 ) alkylthio, halo and phenyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, - (C2 . -C4 ) alkyl, halo, (C -C4 ) alkoxy or (C1-C4) alkylthio;
  • R 5 is -NH 2 or -NHNH 2 ;
  • X is R 8 (Ci-Cg) alkyl; R 8 (C -Cg) alkenyl or phenyl substituted at the ortho position with R 8 where R 8 is
  • R 10 is -C0 2 R 1:L , -P0 3 (R 1:L )2, -P0 (R 1:L ) or -SO3RH, RU and n is 1 to 4 as defined above, and additionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, halo, (C1 . -C4 ) alkoxy, or two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached, form a naphthyl group; and R ⁇ is hydrogen or methyl or ethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Preferred pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are compounds of formula Ij wherein; Rl is phenyl;
  • R 2 is methyl or ethyl
  • R 5 is -NH ;
  • R 6 and R 7 are each hydrogen
  • X is R 8 (C ⁇ -Cg) alkyl or phenyl substituted at the ortho position with R 8 where
  • R 8 is -CO2R 11 ; and R ⁇ is methyl or ethyl.
  • a specific suitable pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention is 2- [l-benzyl-2 , 5-dimethyl-4- (2- carboxyphenylmethyl) pyrrol-3-yl] glyoxamide .
  • the pyrrole compounds are prepared as follows:
  • a suitable Lewis-acid catalyst such as stannic chloride, aluminum chloride, or titanium tetrachloride (preferably stannic chloride)
  • pyrrole (2) is ring alkylated with an alkyl or arylalkyl halide compound of the formula ZCR 6 R 7 X where Z is a suitable halogen and R 8 of X is a protected acid or ester.
  • the reaction is preferably conducted in a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent, such as dichloromethane, at ambient temperatures and allowed to proceed for from about 1 to about 24 hours.
  • Intermediate (3) is converted to (4) by sequential treatment with oxalyl chloride followed by ammonia.
  • Selective reduction of (4) is accomplished in a two step process.
  • a hydride reduction using, for example, sodium borohydride the hydroxy intermediate (5) is prepared which can be further reduced using either catalytic or hydride reduction (preferably palladium on carbon) to prepare (6) .
  • Deprotection of R 8 to the acid may be readily achieved by conventional techniques. For example, when an alkyl ester is used as a protecting group, deprotection can be accomplished by treatment with a base, such as sodium hydroxide .
  • Naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making them are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/091079, filed December 9, 1966 (titled, “Naphthyl Glyoxamides as sPLA2 Inhibitors"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows :
  • R! and R 2 are each independently hydrogen or a non- interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of R! or R 2 must be hydrogen;
  • X is -CH 2 - or -0-; and
  • Y is (CH2) n Z where n is a number from 1-3 and Z is an acid group selected from the group consisting of CO2H, -SO3H or -PO(OH) -
  • a specific suitable naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention has the following structural formula:
  • the naphthyl glyoxamide compounds are prepared as follows:
  • the 1 , 5-dihydroxy napthalene starting material (1) is dispersed in water and then treated with 2 equivalents of potassium hydroxide.
  • the resultant solution is chilled in an ice bath and one equivalent of a strong mineral acid, such as hydrochloric acid, is added to produce the potassium saltt (2) .
  • Alkylation of the radical (2) can then be accomplished by treatment with a methylating agent such as dimethyl sulfate to prepare the ether (3) .
  • Preparation of (4) is achieved by reacting the ether (3) with an appropriately substituted phenol in an Ullman-type reaction using potassium carbonate and cupric oxide .
  • De-methylation of (4) can be accomplished by treating (4) with a 40% HBr/HOAC solution at reflux in a protic polar solvent such as acetic acid, to prepare (5) . Reflux of compound (5) with oxalyl chloride and
  • Alkylation and hydrolysis of the cyclized compound (7) can be achieved by reacting (7) with an alkaliamide base, such as sodium amide, followed by treatment with an alkylating agent, such as methyl bromoacetate, using potassium iodide as a catalyst.
  • an alkaliamide base such as sodium amide
  • an alkylating agent such as methyl bromoacetate
  • the acid (9) is achieved by treating the ester (8) with an alkali base, such as aqueous sodium hydroxide, followed by treatment with a dilute aqueous mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid.
  • an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate .
  • the final product (9) can be purified using standard recrystallization procedures in a suitable organic solvent such as methylene chloride/hexane .
  • a Grignard reagent is prepared.
  • the phenyl Grignard is then reacted with 4-methoxy naphthylnitrile and the resultant compound is hydrolyzed with a dilute acid such as hydrochloric acid to form the benzoyl naphthylene compound (la) .
  • Reduction of (la) to form compound (2a) is accomplished by treatment with a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride .
  • a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride .
  • the reaction is conducted in a solvent- catalyst such as trifluoroacetic acid and initiated in an ice bath which is allowed to warm to room temperature as the reaction proceeds .
  • the desired naphthyl glyoxamide may then be prepared from (2a) according to the procedure in Scheme I starting with the chloromethylation step.
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitor represented by formula (II) as follows :
  • R 1 is -H or -0(CH 2 ) n Z;
  • R 2 is -H or -OH
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently -H, halo or - (C ⁇ -C ) alkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 is -YR 7 and the other is -H, where Y is -0- or -CH2- and R 7 is phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, - (C . -C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two halo groups;
  • Z is -CO2R, -PO3R2 or -SO3R where R is -H or - (C1-C4) alkyl; and n i s 1 - 8 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, racemate or optical isomer thereof; provided that when R 6 is YR 7 , Ri is hydrogen; and when R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 6 are hydrogen and R 5 is YR 7 where Y is -0-, R 7 cannot be phenyl; and when R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 6 are hydrogen, R 5 is YR 7 where Y is CH2, R 7 cannot be phenyl substituted with one methoxy or two chloro groups .
  • Preferred suitable phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows:
  • R , R 3 and R 4 is H, Y is oxygen or CH2, R 7 is phenyl or phenyl substituted at the meta position with one or two substituents selected from halo, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with halo and n is 4-5.
  • a specific suitable phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention is 2- ( 4-carboxybutoxy) -4- (3- phenylphenoxy) phenylacetamide .
  • the phenyl acetimde compounds are prepared as follows:
  • X is halo
  • R 8 and R ⁇ are each independently -H, halo, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two halo groups; and PG is a carboxyl protecting group
  • An appropriately substituted carboxy-protected halophenyl compound (1), where the halogen is preferably bromine, is coupled with an appropriately substituted phenol (2) under modified Ullmann conditions, by refluxing with potassium carbonate and cupric oxide in an aprotic polar solvent, such as pyridine, under an inert gas such as argon.
  • the reaction is substantially complete in 1-24 hours.
  • Intermediate (3) is deprotected by treatment with a base such as aqueous potassium hydroxide using a solvent, such as diethylene glycol .
  • the reaction preferably conducted at about 100°-150 °C, is substantially complete in 1-24 hours.
  • Conversion to the amide (5) can then be readily achieved by treatment first with oxalyl chloride in an alkyl halide solvent, such as methylene chloride, using dimethylformamide as a catalyst, at temperatures of from about 0 °C to ambient temperature, followed by treatment with an excess of ammonia gas, again in an alkyl halide solvent .
  • an alkyl halide solvent such as methylene chloride
  • dimethylformamide as a catalyst
  • Halogenation of (7) is achieved using a halogenating agent, such as N-bromosuccinimide and a catalyst, such as 2 , 2 ' azobisisobutyronitrile, in an alkyl halide solvent, such as chloroform, to prepare (8) .
  • a halogenating agent such as N-bromosuccinimide and a catalyst, such as 2 , 2 ' azobisisobutyronitrile
  • an alkyl halide solvent such as chloroform
  • Treatment of (8) with sodium cyanide in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl formamide produces the nitrile (9) which can then be readily converted to the amide (10) by treatment with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid.
  • an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethyl formamide
  • R 8 and R ⁇ are as shown in Scheme I (a) , X is halo.
  • diphenyl compound (11) is treated with paraformaldehyde and a halogenating agent, such as 40% hydrogen bromide in acetic acid.
  • a halogenating agent such as 40% hydrogen bromide in acetic acid.
  • Two positional isomers result with the X substituent at either the meta or para position of the phenyl ring to which it is attached.
  • Displacement of the halogen to prepare the nitrile isomers (13) can be achieved by treatment of (12) with sodium cyanide in dimethylformamide as described in Schemetl (b) , step (c) , above.
  • the isomers can then be readily separated by conventional chromatographic techniques and each isomer may be converted to its respective amide (14) by treatment with hydrogen peroxide and potassium carbonate in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethylsulfoxide .
  • Intermediate (16) is prepared by refluxing an appropriately substituted diphenyl compound (15) with oxalyl chloride in an alkyl halide solvent, such as chloroform.
  • an alkyl halide solvent such as chloroform.
  • the reaction is catalyzed with 4,4-N- dimethylaminopyridine .
  • Cyclization to the lactone (17) can be achieved under Friedel-Crafts conditions using a suitable metal halide, such as aluminum chloride, as the catalyst.
  • Conversion to the glyoxamide (18) can be achieved by aminolysis of the lactone ring using concentrated ammonium hydroxide .
  • Alkylation of the hydroxy group to prepare the desired alkyl-linked ester (19) occurs by treatment of (18) with an appropriate alkylating agent, such as (X) (CH2) n B where B is CO2PG, -PO3PG or -SO3PG, X is halo and PG is an acid protecting group, preferably methyl.
  • Partial reduction of the carbonyl in the glyoxamide (19) is achieved by treatment with a suitable reducing agent, such as sodium borohydride in methanol, preferably at temperatures of from 0°-20 °C, to prepare the intermediate (20) .
  • a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride in methanol
  • the desired acid or acid salt (21) can be accomplished by treatment with a suitable base, such as sodium hydroxide.
  • intermediate (20) Further reduction of intermediate (20) can be achieved by treatment with triethylsilane in a strong acid, such as trifluroacetic acid, under an inert gas, such as argon, to prepare (22) followed, again, by conversion to the acid or salt (23) with a strong base.
  • a strong acid such as trifluroacetic acid
  • an inert gas such as argon
  • the method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective a naphthyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitor represented by formula (Im)as follows:
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently hydrogen or a non-interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of Ri and R 2 must be hydrogen;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, -0 P- where n is from 2 to 4 and Y is -CO2H, -PO3H2 or SO3H; and X is -0- or -CH2-.
  • an appropriately substituted l-bromo-4-methylnapthalene and an appropriately substituted phenol are dissolved in an aprotic polar solvent such as pyridine.
  • the mixture is treated with an excess of potassium carbonate and an excess of copper- bronze and refluxed under a nitrogen blanket to produce (1) .
  • Bromination of compound (1) to produce (2) is accomplished by refluxing (1) with a brominating agent, such as N-bromosuccinamide, in a non-polar alkyl halide solvent, such as carbon tetrachloride, using 2,2- azobisisobutyronitrile as a catalyst.
  • a brominating agent such as N-bromosuccinamide
  • a non-polar alkyl halide solvent such as carbon tetrachloride
  • Treatment of (2) with sodium cyanide produces (3) .
  • This reaction is best conducted in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), while heating to a temperature of about 60 °C.
  • aprotic polar solvent such as dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)
  • Hydrolysis of the cyano compound (3) to produce the acid (4) is accomplished in two steps.
  • a polar protic solvent such as diethylene glycol as a cosolvent
  • the cyano compound (3) is treated with an alkali metal base, such as potassium hydroxide, and the mixture is heated to about 90-95 °C.
  • the resultant product is then reacted with a strong mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid.
  • Conversion of (4) to the desired naphthyl acetamide compound (5) is accomplished by another two-step process.
  • the acid (4) is dissolved in an alkyl halide solvent such as methylene chloride.
  • the acid/alkyl halide solution is chilled in an ice bath then treated with oxalyl chloride, using dimethylformamide (DMF) as a catalyst, to produce the acid chloride.
  • the solution is allowed to warm to room temperature and then treated with ammonia gas at room temperature to produce (5) .
  • the desired product (5) can be purified using standard recrystallization procedures in a suitable organic solvent, preferably methylene chloride/hexane .
  • a suitable organic solvent preferably methylene chloride/hexane .
  • Compound (la) is prepared by a grignard reaction.
  • the Grignard reagent starting material is prepared by reacting an appropriately substituted phenyl bromide with magnesium and ether.
  • the reagent is then reacted with an appropriately substituted naphthyl nitrile and the resultant compound is hydrolyzed with an aqueous acid such as hydrochloric acid to form the benzoyl napthyl (la) .
  • Reduction of (la) is accomplished by treatment with a molar excess of a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride .
  • the reaction is initiated in an ice bath using a solvent-catalyst such as trifluoroacetic acid and then allowed to warm to room temperature as the reduction proceeds.
  • Chloromethylation of (2a) is achieved by treatment with an excess of formaldehyde and concentrated hydrochloric acid in a polar acidic solvent such as an acetic/phosphoric acid mixture.
  • the reaction is best conducted at a temperature of about 90 °C.
  • the nitrile 4 (a) is prepared by a nucleophilic displacement of the chloride compound (3a) with cyanide.
  • the reaction is conducted by refluxing (3a) with a slight molar excess in an aprotic polar solvent of sodium cyanide such as dimethylformamide (DMF) for about five hours, then allowing the reaction to continues while it cools to room temperature .
  • an aprotic polar solvent of sodium cyanide such as dimethylformamide (DMF)
  • the desired naphthylamide (5a) is then prepared from the nitrile (4a) in a three-step process.
  • a solution of nitrile (4a) dissolved in an aprotic polar solvent such as DMSO, potassium carbonate is added to make the nitrile solution slightly basic.
  • Hydrolysis of the nitrile is then achieved by treatment with an aqueous hydrogen peroxide solution. Crystallization of the naphthyl acetamide may be accomplished by adding water to the peroxide solution.
  • R 3 is other than hydrogen
  • a protected phenol such as a methoxy group
  • the process is conducted, as described above, to prepare compounds (1) - (3) .
  • Acid hydrolysis of the cyano group (3) and deprotection of the protected phenol can be accomplished by treating (3) with a 40% hydrogen bromide solution in acetic acid.
  • the deprotected phenol can then be reacted to prepare the appropriate substituent at the 6-position of the napthyl ring.
  • preparation of compounds where R 3 is -0(CH2) n COOH can be achieved by alkyalting the phenol with an appropriate alkyl halide followed by conversion to the acid by treatment with a base such as aqueous sodium hydroxide followed by dilute hydrochloric acid.
  • substituted phenol and phenyl bromide starting materials are either commercially available or can be readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials. All other reactants and reagents used to prepare the compounds of the present invention are commercially available. FORMULATIONS SUITABLE FOR USE IN THE METHOD OF THE INVENTION
  • the SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention may be administered to treat cystic fibrosis by any means that produces contact of the active agent with the agent's site of action in the human body. They can be administered by any conventional means available for use in conjunction with pharmaceuticals, either as individual therapeutic agents or in a combination of therapeutic agents.
  • the SPLA2 inhibitors can be administered alone, but are generally administered with a pharmaceutical carrier selected on the basis of the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
  • Suitable formulations are those comprising a therapeutically effective amount of SPLA2 inhibitor together with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier, the composition being adapted for the particular route of administration chosen.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable it is meant the carrier, diluent or excipient must be compatible with the SPLA2 inhibitor ("active compound") in the formulation and not deleterious to the subject being treated.
  • any suitable carrier known in the art can be used.
  • the carrier may be a solid, liquid, or mixture of a solid and a liquid.
  • a solid carrier can be one or more substances which may also act as flavoring agents, lubricants, solubilisers, suspending agents, binders, tablet disintegrating agents and encapsulating material.
  • Tablets for oral administration may contain suitable excipients such as calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate, together with disintegrating agents, such as maize, starch, or alginic acid, and/or binding agents, for example, gelatin or acacia, and lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid, or talc.
  • the SPLA2 inhibitor is mixed with a carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired.
  • the powders and tablets preferably contain from about 1 to about 99 weight percent of the SPLA2 inhibitor.
  • Sterile liquid form formulations include suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the active compound can be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, such as sterile water, saline, dextrose solution, sterile organic solvent or a mixture of both.
  • the active compound can be administered orally in solid dosage forms, such as capsules, tablets, and powders, or in liquid dosage forms, such as elixirs, syrups, and suspensions. It can also be administered parenterally, in sterile liquid dosage forms. It can also be administered by inhalation in the form of a nasal spray or lung inhaler. It can also be administered topically as an ointment, cream, gel, paste, lotion, solution, spray, aerosol, liposome, or patch. Dosage forms used to administer the active compound usually contain suitable carriers, diluents, preservatives, or other excipients, as described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, a standard reference text in the field.
  • Gelatin capsules may be prepared containing the active compound and powdered carriers, such as lactose, sucrose, mannitol, starch, cellulose derivatives, magnesium stearate, stearic acid, and the like. Similar diluents can be used to make compressed tablets and powders. Both tablets and capsules can be manufactured as sustained release products to provide for continuous release of medication over a period of hours. Compressed tablets can be sugar coated or film coated to mask any unpleasant taste and protect the tablet from the atmosphere, or enteric coated for selective disintegration in the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration can contain coloring and flavoring to increase patient acceptance.
  • water, a suitable oil, saline, aqueous dextrose (glucose) , and related sugar solutions and glycols such as propylene glycol or polyethylene glycols are suitable carriers for parenteral solutions.
  • Solutions for parenteral administration contain the active compound, suitable stabilizing agents, and if necessary, buffer substances.
  • Anti-oxidizing agents such as sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, or ascorbic acid either alone or combined are suitable stabilizing agents.
  • citric acid and its salts and sodium EDTA are also used.
  • parenteral solutions can contain preservatives, such as benzalkonium chloride, methyl- or propyl-paraben, and chlorobutanol .
  • Topical ointments, creams, gels, and pastes contain with the active compound diluents such as waxes, paraffins, starch, polyethylene glycol, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, animal and vegetable fats, talc and zinc oxide or mixtures of these or other diluents.
  • active compound diluents such as waxes, paraffins, starch, polyethylene glycol, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, animal and vegetable fats, talc and zinc oxide or mixtures of these or other diluents.
  • Topical solutions and emulsions can, for example, contain with the active compound, customary diluents (with the exclusion of solvents having a molecular weight below
  • compositions for topical dosing may also contain preservatives or anti- oxidizing agents.
  • Powders and sprays can contain along with the active compound, the usual diluents, such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, and polyamide powders or mixtures of these materials.
  • Aerosol sprays can contain the usual propellants.
  • Liposomes can be made from such materials as animal or vegetable fats which will form lipid bilayers in which the active compound can be incorporated.
  • the SPLA2 inhibitor or formulations containing the inhibitor can be dissolved or dispersed in liquid form, such as in water or saline, preferably at a concentration at which the composition is fully solubilized and at which a suitable dose can be administered within an inhalable volume.
  • a nebulizer e.g., De Vilbiss 646
  • compressed air generator Pentioaide, DeVilbiss
  • the dose may be adjusted proportionately for size or body weight.
  • Formulations containing compounds of the invention may be administered through the skin by an appliance such as a transdermal patch.
  • Patches can be made of a matrix such as polyacrylamide and a semipermeable membrane made from a suitable polymer to control the rate at which the material is delivered to the skin.
  • Other suitable transdermal patch formulations and configurations are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,296,222 and 5,271,940, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Lipophilic prodrug derivatives of the SPLA2 inhibitors are particularly well suited for transdermal absorption administration and delivery systems.
  • Formulations within the scope of this invention include the admixture of SPLA2 inhibitor with a therapeutically effective amount of any therapeutically effective co-agents for cystic fibrosis such as N-acetyl-cysteine, human recombinant DNAse, antibiotics, etc., as set out in the section "CO-AGENT - COMBINED THERAPY", infra.
  • any therapeutically effective co-agents for cystic fibrosis such as N-acetyl-cysteine, human recombinant DNAse, antibiotics, etc.
  • Formulations used for facilitating lung mucus clearance in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis may further comprise the step of concurrently administering a sodium channel blocker such as amiloride to the subject in an amount effective to inhibit the reabsorption of water from lung mucus membranes.
  • a sodium channel blocker such as amiloride
  • the preferred active compound are the lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compounds as previously described and methods of making as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) .
  • lH-indole-3-glyoxylamides are ( (3- (2-amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -1H- indol-4yl) oxy) acetic acid, sodium salt; and lH-indole-3- glyoxylamides are ( (3- (2-amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4yl) oxy) acetic acid, methyl ester.
  • the lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compound may be used at a concentration of 0.1 to 99.9 weight percent of the formulation.
  • the pharmaceutical formulation is in unit dosage form.
  • the unit dosage form can be a capsule or tablet itself, or the appropriate number of any of these.
  • the quantity of active compound in a unit dose of composition may be varied or adjusted from about 0.1 to about 1000 milligrams or more according to the particular treatment involved.
  • compositions suitable for internal administration contain from about 1 milligram to about 500 milligrams of active compound per unit.
  • the active compound will ordinarily be present in an amount of about 0.5-95% by weight based on the total weight of the composition. Examples of useful pharmaceutical compositions and their proportions of ingredients are illustrated as follows:
  • Capsules may be prepared by filling standard two- piece hard gelatin capsules each with 50 mg of powdered active compound, 175 mg of lactose, 24 mg of talc, and 6 mg of magnesium stearate.
  • Soft Gelatin Capsules A mixture of active compound in soybean oil is prepared and injected by means of a positive displacement pump into gelatin to form soft gelatin capsules containing 50 mg of the active compound. The capsules are washed in petroleum ether and dried.
  • Tablets may be prepared by conventional procedures so that the dosage unit is 50 mg of active compound, 6 mg of magnesium stearate, 70 mg of microcrystalline cellulose, 11 mg of cornstarch, and 225 mg of lactose. Appropriate coatings may be applied to increase palatability or delay absorption .
  • Suspensions An aqueous suspension is prepared for oral administration so that each 5 ml contain 25 mg of finely divided active compound, 200 mg of sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, 5 mg of sodium benzoate, 1.0 g of sorbitol solution, U.S.P., and 0.025 mg of vanillin.
  • a parenteral composition suitable for administration by injection is prepared by stirring 1.5% by weight of active compound in 10% by volume propylene glycol and water. The solution is sterilized by commonly used techniques .
  • Nasal Spray An aqueous solution is prepared such that each 1 ml contains 10 mg of active compound, 1.8 mg methylparaben, 0.2 mg propylparaben and 10 mg methylcellulose .
  • the solution is dispensed into 1 ml vials.
  • the active compound may be used at a concentration of 0.1 to 99.9 weight percent of the formulation.
  • Aerosol formulations are capable of dispersing into particle sizes of from about 0.5 to about 10 microns and have sufficient sPLA2 inhibitor to achieve concentrations of the inhibitor on the airway surfaces of from about 10 ⁇ 10 to 10 -2 moles per liter.
  • SPL 2 inhibitors prevents progressive deterioration of lung tissue and lung function by inhibiting or reducing the degree of inflammation which may be a primary pathologic process in cystic fibrosis.
  • the method of the invention is preferably used early in the life of the patient afflicted with cystic fibrosis, most preferably in a child just after diagnosis of cystic fibrosis.
  • the method of the invention can be practiced using pharmaceutical formulations containing SPLA2 inhibitors (preferably, SPLA2 inhibitors taught to be preferred in this specification) or formulations containing such SPLA2 inhibitors as taught in the preceding section.
  • the underlying cause of cystic fibrosis will not be prevented by the method of this invention, but symptoms will be reduced in severity or extent ameliorated by administration of SPLA2 inhibitors (and their formulations) .
  • the dosage administered will, of course, vary depending upon known factors such as the pharmacodynamic characteristics of the particular agent, and its mode and route of administration; age, health, and weight of the recipient; nature and extent of symptoms, kind of concurrent treatment, frequency of treatment, and the effect desired.
  • a daily dosage of active compound can be about 0.1 to 200 milligrams per kilogram of body weight. Ordinarily 0.5 to 50, and preferably 1 to 25 milligrams per kilogram per day given in divided doses 1 to 6 times a day or in sustained release form is effective to obtain desired results .
  • the SPLA2 inhibitor will be administered to a human so that a therapeutically effective amount is received.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may coventionally be determined for an individual patient by administering the active compound in increasing doses and observing the effect on the patient, for example, reduction in the amount of daily sputum production, improvement in lung function as assessed by standard pulmonary function listing, improvement in exercise, reduction in frequency of bacterial infections, or a reduction in other symptoms associated with cystic fibrosis.
  • sPLA2 inhibitor required for preventing or treating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis (or other indications listed in the "Summary of the Invention", supra.) will vary from person to person, depending on the age and general condition of the subject and the severity of the disease, mode of administration, etc. An appropriate amount may be determined by one of ordinary skill by judging the effective elimination, reduction, or prevention of symptoms associated with cystic fibrosis (e.g., lung mucus clearance) . Generally, the compound must be administered in a manner and a dose to achieve in the human a blood level concentration of SPLA2 inhibitor of from 10 to 3000 nanograms/ml, and preferably a concentration of 100 to 800 nanograms/ml.
  • the treatment regimen for many cystic firbosis may stretch over many days to months or to years .
  • Oral dosing is preferred for patient convenience and tolerance. With oral dosing, one to four oral doses per day, each from about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg of body weight with preferred doses being from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg.
  • parenteral administration (particularly, intravenous administration) is often preferred in instances where rapid alleviation of patient distress is required. With parenteral administration doses of 0.01 to 100 mg/kg/day administered continuously or intermittently throughout the day may be used.
  • parenteral administation the comound may be administered in a physiologic saline vehicle (e.g., 0.9% normal saline, 0.45% normal saline, etc.) a dextrose vehicle (e.g., 5% dextrose in water), or a combination of saline and dextrose vehicle (0.9% normal saline in 5% dextrose) .
  • Inhalation therapy also may be useful either alone or as an adjunct to other routes of administration. With inhalation therapy, doses necessary to produce a decrease in the clinical symptoms of cystic fibrosis are readily determined and used.
  • the SPLA2 inhibitor (viz., active compound in a formulation of the invention) can also be administered in the method of the invention in combination with another pharmacologically active agent known to have utility for alleviating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis.
  • the sPLA2 inhibitors taught herein may be combined with the following therapeutic agents :
  • Inhaled drugs a. beta-adrenergic agonists b. anticholinergics
  • cystic fibrosis The diagnostic criteria for cystic fibrosis are those found in standard medical references (e.g., Harrison's
  • the cystic fibrosis patient having lung disease may be evaluated with any conventional measure of lung capacity, nature of extent of sputum, and etc.
  • the cystic fibrosis patient having gastointestinal disease may be evaluated by conventional criteria for adaquate nutrition.

Abstract

A method is disclosed for the treatment of cystic fibrosis by administering to a human in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an sPLA2 inhibitor, such as a 1H-indole-3-glyoxylamide.

Description

METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF CYSTIC FIBROSIS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention is directed to a method for treating cystic fibrosis . More specifically, the present invention is directed to a method for treating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an SPLA2 inhibitor.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Cystic fibrosis is a hereditary disorder of the lungs, digestive, and reproductive systems. One in 2500 people in the general population in America are born with cystic fibrosis. It typically appears in early childhood and is a lifelong illness that generally gets more severe with age. Average life expectancy and quality of life are significantly reduced. There is no cure for cystic fibrosis at this time.
In cystic fibrosis the glands which produce mucus, saliva, and intestinal fluids do not work properly. Thick mucus in the lungs interferes with removal of pollutants and can cause breathing problems, infections, and lung damage.
Thick secretions also may clog the pancreatic duct and block transfer of enzymes from the pancreas to the intestine. These enzymes help break down food so the body has proper growth and weight gain.
Males with cystic fibrosis are usually infertile and females may have reduced fertility due to thick secretions in the reproductive tract.
Major therapies for cystic fibrosis include the following:
1. gene therapy
2. breathing exercises
3. agents that degrade the high concentration of DNA in cystic fibrosis, e.g., human recombinant DNAse
4. drugs to restore salt and water balance, e.g., amiloride, triphosphite nucleotides
5. antibiotics for lung infection
6. inhaled beta-adrenergic agonists 7. pancreatic enzymes are taken with meals
U.S. Patent No. 5,453,443 describes bis (aryloxy) alkanes as inhibitors of phopholipase A2 enzymes useful for a list of many disease states, inclusive of cystic fibrosis. The mechanism of action for airway inflammation in cystic fibrosis remains poorly understood, but arachidonic acid may have a role (see, "Cystic Fibrosis Gene Mutation (dF508) is Associated with Intrinsic Abnormality in Ca2+ - Induced Arachiodonic Acid Release by Epithelial Cells" by Miele, L . ; Cordella-Miele, Eleonora; Xing, Mingzhao;
Frizzell, R.; Mukherjee, Anil., DNA and Cell Biology, Vol 16, No. 6, 1997, Many Ann Liebert, Inc., pp. 749-759). U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326 describes the use of lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide sPLA2 inhibitors to inhibit the sPLA2 mediated release of fatty acid.
Accordingly, there is a substantial need for a novel effective, and easy to administer treatment for the many symptoms of cystic fibrosis. It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a methodology for effectively treating cystic fibrosis.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention is a method of alleviating the symptoms of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis by administering a therapeutically effective amount of a selected SPLA2 inhibitor . This invention is also a method of facilitating the clearance of retained pulmonary secretions in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis.
This invention is also a method of facilitating lung mucus clearance in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis. This invention is also a method of inhibiting inflammation in the lungs in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis .
This invention is also the use of SPLA2 inhibitors to reduce the complications of acute or chronic infections of the respiratory tree in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis .
This invention is also the use of SPLA2 inhibitors for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylactic or therapeutic treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions : General Definitions:
The term, "therapeutically effective amount" is a quantity of SPLA2 inhibitor sufficient to significantly alleviate symptoms of cystic fibrosis in a human.
The term, "parenteral" means not through the alimentary canal but by some other route such as subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraorbital, intracapsular, intraspinal, intrasternal, or intravenous.
The term, "active compound" means one or more SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention.
I. sPLA2 INHIBITORS USEFUL IN THE METHOD OF THE INVENTION: Selected classes of secretary phopholipase A2 (SPLA2) inhibitors are useful in the practice of the method of this invention .
Exemplary of classes of suitable SPLA2 useful in the the method of the invention for treatment of cystic fibrosis are the following:
lH-indole-3-glyoxylamides lH-indole-3-hydrazides 1H-indole-3-acetamides lH-indole-1-glyoxylamides
1H-indole-1-hydrazides 1H-indole-1-acetamides indolizine-1-acetamides indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazides indolizine-1-glyoxylamides indene-1-acetamides indene-1-acetic acid hydrazides indene-1-glyoxylamides carbazoles & tetrahydrocarbazoles pyrazoles phenyl glyoxamides pyrroles naphthyl glyoxamides phenyl acetamides naphthyl acetamides
Each of the above SPL 2 inhibitor types is discussed in the following sections (a) through (m) wherein details of their molecular configuration are given along with methods for their preparation. a) The lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide SPLA2 inhibitors and method of making them are described in U.S. Patent 5,654,326, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Another method of making lH-indole- 3-glyoxylamide SPLA2 inhibitors is described in United States Patent Application Serial No. 09/105381, filed June 26, 1998 and titled, "Process for Preparing 4-substituted l-H-Indole-3-glyoxyamides" the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. United States Patent Application Serial No. 09/105381 discloses the following process having steps (a) thru (i) :
Preparing a compound of the formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug derivative thereof
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein :
R! is selected from the group consisting of -C7-C20 alkyl,
Figure imgf000008_0001
Figure imgf000008_0002
where
RIO is selected from the group consisting of halo, C -C o alkyl, C -C o alkoxy, -S- (C -C o alkyl) and halo (C -Cχø) alkyl, and t is an integer from 0 to 5 both inclusive;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), aryl, aryloxy and HET; R4 is selected from the group consisting of -CO2H, -SO3H and -P(O) (OH) 2 or salt and prodrug derivatives thereof; and
R5, R6 and R"^ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C^-Cg) alkyl, (C -Cg) alkoxy, halo (C -Cg) alkoxy, halo (C2~Cg) alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo and aryl; which process comprises the steps of: a) halogenating a compound of formula X
Figure imgf000008_0003
X where R8 is (C]_-Cg) alkyl, aryl or HET; with SO2CI2 to form a compound of formula IX
Figure imgf000009_0001
hydrolyzing and decarboxylating a compound of formula IX
Figure imgf000009_0002
o form a compound of formula VIII
Figure imgf000009_0003
II
alkylating a compound of formula VII
Figure imgf000009_0004
I
with a compound of formula VIII
Figure imgf000009_0005
to form a compound of formula VI
Figure imgf000010_0001
aminating and dehydrating a compound of formula VI
Figure imgf000010_0002
with an a ine of the formula R^NH2 in the presence of a solvent that forms and azeotrope with water to form a compound of formula V;
oxidizing a compound of formula V
Figure imgf000010_0003
by refluxing in a polar hydrocarbon solvent having a boiling point of at least 150 °C and a dielectric constant of at least 10 in the presence of a catalyst to form a compound of formula IV
Figure imgf000011_0001
alkylating a compound of the formula IV
Figure imgf000011_0002
with an alkylating agent of the formula XCH2R4a where X is a leaving group and R4a is -Cθ2R4b, -S03R4b, -P(O) (OR4b)2, or -P (0) (OR4b) H, where R4b is an acid protecting group to form a compound of formula III
Figure imgf000011_0003
g) reacting a compound of formula III
Figure imgf000011_0004
with oxalyl chloride and ammonia to form a compound of formula II
Figure imgf000012_0001
h) optionally hydrolyzing a compound of formula II
Figure imgf000012_0002
to form a compound of formula I; and i) optionally salifying a compound of formula I
The synthesis methodology for making the lH-indole-3- glyoxylamide SPLA2 inhibitor starting material may be by any suitable means available to one skilled in the chemical arts. However, such methodology is not part of the present invention which is a method of use, specifically, a method of treating mammal afflicted or susceptible to cystic fibrosis.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the compound represented by formula (la), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug derivative thereof;
Figure imgf000013_0001
wherein ; both X are oxygen;
R_ is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000013_0002
and
Figure imgf000013_0003
where Rχo is a radical independently selected from halo, Cχ-Cχo alkyl, Cχ-Cχo alkoxy, -S- (Cχ-Cχo alkyl), and Cχ-Cχo haloalkyl and t is a number from 0 to 5;
R2 is selected from the group; halo, cyclopropyl, methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) . wherein -(La)- is an acid linker; provided, the acid linker group, -(La)-, for R4 is selected from the group consisting of;
Figure imgf000014_0001
and provided, the acid linker, -(La)-, for R5 is selected from group consisting of;
Figure imgf000015_0001
Figure imgf000015_0002
Figure imgf000016_0001
Figure imgf000016_0002
Figure imgf000016_0003
wherein Rg4 and Rg5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, Cχ-Cχo alkyl, aryl, C -C o alkaryl, C -C o aralkyl, carboxy, carbalkoxy, and halo; and provided, that at least one of R4 and R5 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) and wherein the (acidic group) on the group - (La) - (acidic group) of R4 or R5 is selected from -C02H, -SO3H, or -P(0) (OH) 2;
Rg and R7 are each independently selected form hydrogen and non-interfering substituents, with the non- interfering substituents being selected from the group consisting of the following: C -Cg alkyl, C2~C alkenyl, C2~C alkynyl, C7-C12 aralkyl, C7-C12 alkaryl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkenyl, phenyl, tolulyl, xylenyl, biphenyl, C]_-Cg alkoxy, C2~Cg alkenyloxy, C2~C alkynyloxy, C2~C 2 alkoxyalkyl, C2~Cχ2 alkoxyalkyloxy, C2_C 2 alkylcarbonyl, C2-C 2 alkylcarbonylamino, C2-C 2 alkoxyamino, C2~C 2 alkoxyaminocarbonyl, C2~C 2 alkyla ino, C -Cg alkylthio, C2~C 2 alkylthiocarbonyl, Cι_-Cg alkylsulfinyl, C -Cg alkylsulfonyl, C2~C haloalkoxy, C -Cg haloalkylsulfonyl, C2~Cg haloalkyl, Cχ-Cg hydroxyalkyl, -C(0)0(Cχ-Cg alkyl), - (CH ) n-0- (cl_c6 alkyl), benzyloxy, phenoxy, phenylthio, - (CONHSO2R) , -CHO, amino, amidino, bromo, carbamyl, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, - (CH2 ) n-Cθ2H, chloro, cyano, cyanoguanidinyl, fluoro, guanidino, hydrazide, hydrazino, hydrazido, hydroxy, hydroxyamino, iodo, nitro, phosphono, -SO3H, thioacetal, thiocarbonyl, and C -Cg carbonyl; where n is from 1 to 8. Preferred for practicing the method of the invention are lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compounds and all corresponding pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrug derivatives thereof which are useful in the method of the invention include the following:
(A) [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-methyl-l- (phenylmethyl) - lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(B) dl-2- [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-methyl-l-
(phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] propanoic acid,
(C) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl)-l- ( [ 1, 1 ' -biphenyl] -2- ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (D) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, 1' -biphenyl] -3- ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (E) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, 1 ' -biphenyl] -4- ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (F) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -l-[ (2, 6- dichlorophenyl) methyl] -2-methyl-lH-indol-4- yl] oxy] acetic acid
(G) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -l-[4 (- fluorophenyl) methyl] -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (H) [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-methyl-l- [ (1- naphthalenyl) methyl] -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (I) [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) - lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(J) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -l-[ (3- chlorophenyl ) ethyl] -2-ethyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (K) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'-biphenyl] -2- ylmethyl) -2-ethyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(L) [ [3- (2-amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'-biphenyl] -2- ylmethyl) -2-propyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (M) [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-cyclopropyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (N) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'-biphenyl] -2- ylmethyl) -2-cyclopropyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (O) 4- [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l-
(phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-5-yl] oxy]butanoic acid, (P) mixtures of (A) through (P) in any combination. Particularly useful prodrugs of the compounds of formula (I) and named compounds (A) thru (0) are the simple aromatic and aliphatic esters, such as the methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, sec-butyl, tert-butyl ester, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester, and morpholino-N-ethyl ester. Methods of making ester prodrugs are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326. Additional methods of prodrug synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063280 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063646 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Morpholino-N-ethyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063284 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Isopropyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole SPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Most preferred in the practice of the method of the invention are the acid, sodium salt, methyl ester, and morpholino-N-ethyl ester forms of [ [3- ( 2-Amino-1, 2- dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4- yl] oxy] acetic acid as represented by the following formulae:
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000021_0001
Another highly preferred compound is the indole-3- glyoxylamide morpholino ethyl ester of represented by the formula:
Figure imgf000021_0002
the preparation of which is further described in United States provisional patent application SN 60/063,646 filed October 27, 1997. Synthesis methods for lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide SPLA2 inhibitors are additionally depicted in the following reaction scheme:
lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide Reaction Scheme
Figure imgf000022_0001
1
Figure imgf000022_0002
Figure imgf000022_0003
Figure imgf000022_0005
Figure imgf000022_0004
Figure imgf000023_0001
Explanation of Reaction Scheme:
To obtain the glyoxylamides substituted in the 4-position with an acidic function through an oxygen atom, the reactions outlined in scheme 1 are used (for conversions 1 through 5, see ref. Robin D. Clark, Joseph M. Muchowski, Lawrence E. Fisher, Lee A. Flippin, David B. Repke, Michel Souchet, Synthesis, 1991, 871-878, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference) . The ortho- nitrotoluene, 1, is readily reduced to the 2-methylaniline, 2, using Pd/C as catalyst. The reduction can be carried out in ethanol or tetrahydrofuran (THF) or a combination of both, using a low pressure of hydrogen. The aniline, 2, on heating with di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in THF at reflux temperature is converted to the N-tert-butylcarbonyl derivative, 3, in good yield. The dilithium salt of the dianion of 3 is generated at -40 to -20 °C in THF using sec- butyl lithium and reacted with the appropriately substituted N-methoxy-N-methylalkanamide . This product, 4, may be purified by crystallization from hexane, or reacted directly with trifluoroacetic acid in methylene chloride to give the 1, 3-unsubstituted indole 5. The 1, 3-unsubstituted indole 5 is reacted with sodium hydride in dimethylformamide at room temperature (20-25 °C) for 0.5-1.0 hour. The resulting sodium salt of 5 is treated with an equivalent of arylmethyl halide and the mixture stirred at a temperature range of 0-100 °C, usually at ambient room temperature, for a period of 4 to 36 hours to give the 1-arylmethylindole, 6. This indole, 6, is O-demethylated by stirring with boron tribromide in methylene chloride for approximately 5 hours (see ref. Tsung-Ying Shem and Charles A Winter, Adv. Drug Res., 1977, 12, 176, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) . The 4-hydroxyindole, 7, is alkylated with an alpha bromoalkanoic acid ester in dimethylformamide (DMF) using sodium hydride as a base, with reactions conditions similar to that described for the conversion of 5 to 6. The a- [ (indol-4-yl) oxy] alkanoic acid ester, 8, is reacted with oxalyl chloride in methylene chloride to give 9, which is not purified but reacted directly with ammonia to give the glyoxamide 10. This product is hydrolyzed using IN sodium hydroxide in MeOH . The final glyoxylamide, 11, is isolated either as the free carboxylic acid or as its sodium salt or in both forms.
The most preferred compound, [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2- dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4- yl] oxy] acetic acid (as well as its sodium salt and methyl ester) useful in the practice of the method of the invention, may be prepared by the following procedure:
Preparation of [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, a compound represented by the formula:
Figure imgf000025_0001
Part A. Preparation of 2-Ethyl-4-methoxy-lH-indole .
A solution of 140 mL (0.18 moi) of 1.3M sec-butyl lithium in cyclohexane is added slowly to N-tert- butoxycarbonyl-3-methoxy-2-methylaniline (21.3g, 0.09 moi) in 250 mL of THF keeping the temperature below -40 °C with a dry ice-ethanol bath. The bath is removed and the temperature allowed to rise to 0 °C and then the bath replaced. After the temperature has cooled to -60 °C,
18.5 g (0.18 mmol) of N-methoxy-N-methylpropanamide in an equal volume of THF iss added dropwise. The reaction mixture is stirred 5 minutes, the cooling bath removed and stirred an additional 18 hours. It is then poured into a mixture of 300 mL of ether and 400 mL of 0.5N HC1. The organic layer is separated, washing with water, brine, dried over MgS04, and concentrated at reduced pressure to give 25.5g of a crude of 1- [2- ( tert-butoxycarbonylamino) -6- methoxyphenyl] -2-butanone . This material is dissolved in 250 mL of methylene chloride and 50 mL of trifluoroacetic acid and stirred for a total of 17 hours. The mixture is concentrated at reduced pressure and ethyl acetate and water added to the remaining oil. The ethyl acetate is separated, washed with brine, dried (MgSU4) and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed three times on silica eluting with 20% EtOAc/hexane to give 13.9g of 2-ethyl-4-methoxy-lH- indole .
Analysis for C^H^NO: Calculated: C, 75.40; H, 7.48; N, 7.99; Found: C, 74.41; H, 7.64 ; N, 7.97.
Part B. Preparation of 2-Ethyl-4-methoxy-l- (phenylmethyl ) - lH-indole . 2-Ethyl-4-methoxy-lH-indole (4.2g, 24 mmol) is dissolved in 30 mL of DMF and 960mg (24 mmol) of 60% NaH/mineral oil is added. After 1.5 hours, 2.9 mL(24 mmol) of benzyl bromide is added. After 4 hours, the mixture is diluted with water extracting twice with ethyl acetate. The combined ethyl acetate is washed with brine, dried ( gS0 ) and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel and eluted with 20% EtOAc/hexane to give 3.1g (49% yield) of 2-ethyl-4-methoxy- 1- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indole.
Part C. Preparation of 2-Ethyl-4-hydroxy-l- (phenylmethyl) - lH-indole .
A solution of 3.1g (11.7 mmol) of 2-ethyl-4-methoxy-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indole and 48.6 mL of 1M BBr3/CH2Cl in 50 mL of methylene chloride is stirred at room temperature for 5 hours and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with brine and dried (MgS04). After concentrating at reduced pressure, the residue is chromatographed on silica gel eluting with 20% EtOAc/hexane to give 1.58g (54% yield) of 2-ethyl-4-hydroxy- 1- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indole, mp, 86-90 °C . Analysis for C17H 7NO:
Calculated: C, 81.24; H, 6.82; N, 5.57; Found: C, 81.08; H, 6.92; N, 5.41. Part D. Preparation of [ [2-Ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl ) -lH-indol- 4-yl] oxy] acetic acid tert-butyl ester.
2-Ethyl-4-hydroxy-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indole (5.82 g, 20 mmol) is added to 7.82g (24 mmol) cesium carbonate in 25 mL DMF and the mixture is stirred at 35 °C for 30 minutes. After cooling to 20 °C, a solution of tert- butyl bromoacetate (4.65 g, 23.8 mmol) in 5 mL DMF is added and stirring maintained until the reaction is judged complete by TLC analysis (several hours) . The mixture is diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate solution is washed with brine, dried (MgSθ4) and concentrated at reduced pressure to give 6.8g of solid. Mass spectrum: 365 Analyses for C23H27NO3:
Calculated: C, 75.59; H, 7.75; N, 3.83; Found: C, 75.87; H, 7.48; N, 3.94.
Part E. Preparation of [ [2-Ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -3-ureido- lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid tert-butyl ester. A solution of 2.3g (6.3 mmol) [ [2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid tert-butyl ester and 4.8g (12.6 mmol) bis (2 , 2, 2-trichloroethyl) - azodicarboxylate in diethyl ether is stirred for 24 hours at room temperature. The resulting solid is filtered and vacuum dried. This adduct (lg, 1.3 mmol) is dissolved in 10 mL of THF and treated with zinc (1 g) and glacial acetic acid (0.5 mL) . After stirring for 30 minutes at room temperature an excess of trimethylsilylisocyanate in 1 mL of THF is added and stirring is continued at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture is diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried over MgSθ4 and concentrated to dryness to give 0.385g (69% yield) of the subtitled material. Mass spectrum: 423. Analyses for C24H29N3O4:
Calculated: C, 68.07; H, 6.90; N, 9.92; Found: C, 67.92; H, 6.84; N, 9.70.
Part F. Preparation of [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2- ethyl-1- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid. A mixture of 788mg (2 mmol) of [3- (2-amino-l, 2- dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] - acetic acid methyl ester, 10 mL of In NaOH and 30 L of MeOH is heated to maintain reflux for 0.5 hour, stirred at room temperature for 0.5 hour and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is taken up in ethyl acetate and water, the aqueous layer separated and made acidic to pH 2-3 with IN HC1. The precipitate is filtered and washed with ethyl acetate to give 559 mg (74% yield) of [ [3- (2-amino- 1, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4- yl] oxy] acetic acid, mp, 230-234 °C. Analyses for C2iH20N2l")5 :
Calculated: C, 65.96; H, 5.80; N, 7.33; Found: C, 66.95; H, 5.55; N, 6.99.
b) lH-indole-3-hydrazide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in practicing the method of the invention are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,578,634; the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the described as lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazides represented by the formula (lb) , and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and prodrugs thereof;
Figure imgf000029_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur;
R^ is selected from groups (i), (ii) and (iii) where; (i) is C4-C20 alkyl, C4-C20 alkenyl, C -C20 alkynyl, C -C20 haloalkyl, C4-C 2 cycloalkyl, or
(ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C]_-Cιo alkylthio,
Figure imgf000029_0002
alkoxy, C_-Cιo alkyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; (iii) is
Figure imgf000029_0003
where y is from 1 to 8, R74 is, independently, hydrogen or C -C o alkyl, and R75 is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, nitro, phenyl, -SH, Cχ-Cιo alkylthio, C]_-Cιo alkoxy, C -C o alkyl, amino, hydroxyamino or a substituted or unsubstituted 5- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring;
R2 is halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, ethenyl, Cχ-C2 alkylthio, Cχ-C2 alkoxy, -CHO, -CN; each R3 is independently hydrogen, C -C3 alkyl, or halo;
R4 R5, Rg, and R7 are each independently hydrogen, Cχ-C o alkyl, C -C o alkenyl, C -Cχo alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R4 R5, Rg, and R7 combined with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6- membered substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclic ring; or C -C o haloalkyl, C -C o alkoxy, C -C ø haloalkoxy, C4-C8 cycloalkoxy, phenoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxyl, -SH, -CN, -S(C -Cχo alkyl), arylthio, thioacetal, -C (0) 0 (Cχ-Cχo alkyl), hydrazino, hydrazido, -NH2, -NO2 , -NR82R83' and -C (0) R82R83' where, R 2 and Rg3 are independently hydrogen, C -C o alkyl, Cχ-C o hydroxyalkyl, or taken together with N, R 2 and R83 form a 5- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; or a group having the formula;
Figure imgf000030_0001
where, each R7g is independently selected from hydrogen, C -C]_o alkyl, hydroxy, or both R7g taken together are =0; p is 1 to 8,
Z is a bond, -0-, -N(C]_-C]_Q alkyl)-, -NH, or -S-; and
Q is -CON(R82R83) ' -5-tetrazolyl, -SO3H,
0
OR, 86
OR8 O
Figure imgf000031_0001
O
C 0R86 ,
Figure imgf000031_0002
where Rgg is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or C -Cχo alkyl.
The synthesis of the lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazides of structure (I) can be accomplished by known methods such as outlined in the following reaction schemes: Scheme 1
Figure imgf000032_0001
III
Figure imgf000032_0002
The lH-indole-3-acetic acid ester can be readily alkylated by an alkyl halide or arylalkyl halide in a solvent such as N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) in the presence of a base (meth a) to give the intermediate l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III. Bases such as potassium t-butoxide and sodium hydride were particularily useful. It is advantageous to react the indole, II, with the base to first form the salt of II and then add the alkylating agent. Most alkylations can be carried out at room temperature. Treatment of the l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III, with hydrazine or hydrazine hydrate in ethanol (meth b) gives the desired l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazides, I. This condensation to form I is usually carried out at the reflux temperature of the solvent for a period of 1 to 24 hours.
c) lH-indole-3-acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making these inhibitors are set out in U.S. Patent No. 5,684,034, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of the compound represented by (lib), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrug derivatives thereof,
Figure imgf000033_0001
wherein ;
X is oxygen or sulfur;
R]_]_ is selected from groups (i), (ii) (iii) and (iv) where;
(i) is Cg-C20 alkyl, Cg-C20 alkenyl, Cg-C20 alkynyl, Cg-C20 haloalkyl, C4-C 2 cycloalkyl, or
(ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, nitro, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C1-C10 alkyl, C1-C10 alkylthio, C1-C10 alkoxyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; or
(iii) is -(CH2)n-(R8θ) > or -(NH)-(R81), where n is 1 to 8, and Rgo i a group recited in (i), and Rgi is selected from a group recited in (i) or (ii);
(iv) is
R-87
R: 87
where R87 is hydrogen or Cχ-C o alkyl, and Rg8 is selected from the group; phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and biphenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C -C o alkylthio, C -C g alkoxyl, phenyl, nitro, C -C g alkyl, C -C g haloalkyl, carboxyl, amino, hydroxyamino; or a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 8 membered heterocyclic ring;
R 2 is halo, C]_-C2 alkylthio, or C -C2 alkoxy; each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halo, or methyl;
R14 R15' R16' anc R17 are each independently hydrogen, Cχ-Cχo alkyl, Cχ-C]_Q alkenyl, C -Cχo alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R 4 R15, R16' anc^ R17? combine with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a 5 or 6 membered substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclic ring; or C -C o haloalkyl, C -C o alkoxy, C -C o haloalkoxy, C4-C8 cycloalkoxy, phenoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxyl, -SH, -CN, cl~c10 alkylthio, arylthio, thioacetal, -C (O) 0 (Cχ-Cχo alkyl), hydrazide, hydrazino, hydrazido, -NH2, -NO2, -NRg2R83' anc^ ~C (0) NRg2R83 A where, Rg2 and R83 are independently hydrogen, C -Cχo alkyl, C -C]_Q hydroxyalkyl, or taken together with N, R 2 and R83 form a 5- to 8- membered heterocyclic ring; or a group having the formula;
Figure imgf000034_0001
where,
R84 and R85 are each independently selected from hydrogen, C -Cχg alkyl, hydroxy, or Rg4 and R 5 taken together are =0; p is 1 to 5,
Z is a bond, -0-, -N(Cι-Cχ0 alkyl)-, -NH-, or -S-; and
Q is -CON(R82R83) ' -5-tetrazolyl, -SO3H, 0
-p. OR, 86
OR 86 0
Figure imgf000035_0001
0 R 9, 9
.p t o— (CH2)π N R 99
OR86 R 99 O
R 99
o- O (CH2)H N R 99
OR; 86 R 99
Figure imgf000035_0002
where n is 1 to 8, R g is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or C -C n alkyl, and R99 is selected from hydrogen or C -C n alkyl. The synthesis of the lH-indole-3-acetamides of structure (lib) useful in the method of the invention can be accomplished by known methods. A procedure useful for the syntheses of these compounds is shown in the following reaction scheme:
Figure imgf000036_0001
V
The lH-indole-3-acetamide II may be alkylated by an alkyl halide or arylalkyl halide in a solvent such as N,N- dimethylformamide (DMF) in the presence of a base (method a) to give intermediate l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III. Bases such as potassium t-butoxide and sodium hydride are useful. It is advantageous to react the indole, II, with the base to first form the salt of II and then add alkylating agent. Treatment of the l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid esters, III, with hydrazine or hydrazine hydrate in ethanol (method b) gives the desired l-alkyl-lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazides, IV. This condensation to form IV may be carried out at the reflux temperature of the solvent for a period of 1 to 24 hours. The acetic acid hydrazides, IV, are hydrogenated to give the acetamides, I, by heating with Raney nickel in ethanol (method c) . The intermediate acetic acid esters, III, can be first hydrolyzed to the acetic acid derivatives, V (method d) , which on treatment with an alkyl chloroformate followed by anhydrous ammonia, also give amides, I (method e) .
d) lH-indole-1-functional SPLA2 inhibitors of the hydrazide, amide, or glyoxylamide types as described in United States Patent No. 5,641,800, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-1-acetamide or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ic);
Figure imgf000037_0001
wherein for Formula (Ic) X is oxygen or sulfur; each R]_ is independently hydrogen, or C2-C3 alkyl; R3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgo; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg i a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen; Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group), wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) ;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
lH-indole-1-hydrazide compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows : A lH-indole-1-hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (lie);
Figure imgf000039_0001
wherein for formula (lie);
X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, or C -C3 alkyl; R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituent; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgn; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgn is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -O- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of ltto 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group,
- (La) - (acidic group), wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) ;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents. e) Indolizine SPLA2 inhibitors and their method of preparation are described in US Patent Application Serial No. 08/765566, filed July 20, 1995 (titled, "Synovial Phospholipase A2 Inhibitor Compounds Having an Indolizine Type Nucleus, Parmaceutical Formulations Containing Said compounds, and Therapeutic Methods of Using said Compounds"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; and also in European Patent Publication No. 0772596, published May 14, 1997. The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of lH-indole-1-functional compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Id);
Figure imgf000040_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, C -C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rχ3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
Rχ2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen; R 7 and R g are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group), wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R 7 and R g must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and R 5 and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
Particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows: An indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof where said compound is represented by the formula (lid) ;
Figure imgf000041_0001
Particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows:
An indolizine-1-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Hid);
Figure imgf000042_0001
Another preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows:
An indolizine-3-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (IVd), as set out below:
Figure imgf000042_0002
wherein; X is selected from oxygen or sulfur; each R3 is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo; Rx is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) , wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R5 and Rg must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R7 and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
Particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows:
An indolizine-3-hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Vd) , as set out below:
Figure imgf000044_0001
Particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows :
An indolizine-3-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (VId) , as set out below:
Figure imgf000044_0002
Particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows: An indolizine-1-acetamide functional compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is selected from the group represented by the following formulae:
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000045_0002
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000046_0002
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000047_0002
Figure imgf000048_0001
and mixtures of the above compounds
Other particularly preferred lH-indole-1-functional compounds useful as SPLA2 inhibitors in the practice of the method of the invention are as follows :
An indolizine-1-glyoxylamide functional compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is selected from the group represented by the following formulae:
Figure imgf000048_0002
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000049_0002
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000050_0002
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000051_0002
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000052_0002
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000053_0002
Figure imgf000053_0003
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000054_0002
Figure imgf000054_0003
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure imgf000055_0002
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000056_0002
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000057_0002
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000058_0002
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000059_0002
Figure imgf000059_0003
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000060_0002
Figure imgf000060_0003
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000061_0002
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000062_0002
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000063_0002
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000064_0002
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0002
Figure imgf000065_0003
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000066_0002
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000067_0002
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000068_0002
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000069_0002
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000070_0002
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000071_0002
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000072_0002
COCONH2
and mixtures of the above compounds.
The indolizine compounds may be made by one of more of the following reaction schemes:
The following abbreviations are used throughout the synthesis Schemes:
Bn benzyl THF tetrahydrofuran LAH lithium aluminum hydride LDA lithium diiopropyl amine DBU 1,8-diazabicyclo 5.4.0] undec-7-une
S cheme l e - Part 1
Figure imgf000073_0001
6: R=Li, 7:R=H
Figure imgf000073_0002
The anion of 2-methyl-5-methoxypyridine is formed in THF using lithium diisopropyl amide and reacted with benzonitrile to produce 2. Alkylation of the nitrogen of 2tby l-bromo-2-butanone followed by base catalyzed cyclization forms 3 which is reduced by LAH to 4. Sequential treatment of 4 with oxalyl chloride and ammonia gives 8. Alternatively, 4 is acylated with ethyl oxalyl chloride to give 5 which is converted to 6 with lithium hydroxide and then to 8 by sequential treatment with ethyl chloroformate and ammonium hydroxide. Demethylation of 8 by BBr3 yields 9 which is O-alkylated using base and ethyl 4-bromobutyrate to form 10. Hydrolysis of 10 by aqueous base produces 11.
Scheme 2 e - Part 1
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0002
17 Ri R, R* 18 R1 R2 R3 R4 a: OEt Et Bn a: OEt Et Bn o-Ph-Ph b: NH2 Et Bn b: NH2 Et Bn o-Ph-Ph c: NH2 Et CH2COEt c: NH2 Et Bn m-CI-Ph d: NH2 cyclo-Pr Bn d: NH2 Et CH2COEt m-CI-Ph e: NH2 cyclo-Pr Bn o-Ph-Ph f: NH2 Et Bn Ph g: NH2 Et Bn 1 -Naphthyl
Compound 12 (N. Desidiri, A. Galli, I. Sestili, and M. L. Stein, Arch. Pharm. ( einheim) 325, 29, (1992)) is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to 14 which gives 15 on ammonolysis using ammonium hydroxide. O-alkylation of 15 using benzyl chloride and base affords 16. Alkylation of the nitrogen atom of 13 or 16 by 1-bromo- 2-ketones followed by base catalyzed cyclization yields indolizines 17 which are acylated by aroyl halides to form 18. Scheme 2e Part 2
Figure imgf000075_0001
19a-g 20v-z
Figure imgf000075_0002
19 R1 R, R» R a: CH2OH Et Bn o-Ph-Ph b: CONH2 Et Bn o-Ph-Ph c: CONH2 Et CH2CH(OH)Et m-CI-Ph d: CONH2 Et Bn m-CI-Ph e: CONH2 cyclo-Pr Bn o-Ph-Ph f: CONH2 Et Bn Ph g: CONH2 Et Bn 1 -Naphthyl
20-22 R2 3 R4 v: Et Et Ph w: Et Me 1 -Naphthyl x: Et Bn o-Ph-Ph y: Et Bn m-CI-Ph z: cyclo-Pr Me o-Ph-Ph
Reduction of 18 by tert-butylamine-borohydride and aluminum chloride yields 19 which is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give 20. O-alkylation of 20 by benzyl bromoacetate and base forms 21 which is converted to the acid 22 by debenzylation using hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C. Scheme 3e - Part 1
X^ Rl
OH BnCI I B DnUUO O
- NaajH± x J^y^ ^ C00Et NaHC03 a, f*ϊ l COOEt y N N
23 24
Figure imgf000076_0001
25a: Rt=Et b: R-|=cyclo-Pr 26a-f
Figure imgf000076_0002
27a-f 28a-f
26-28 R S
Et Ph Et o-Ph-Ph Et m-CI-Ph Et m-CF3-Ph Et 1 -Naphthyl f: cyclo-Pr o-Ph-Ph
Compound 23 (N. Desideri F. Manna, M. L. Stein, G. Bile, W. Filippeelli, and E. Marmo, Eur. J. Med. Chem. Chim. Ther., 18, 295, (1983)) is O-alkylated using sodium hydride and benzyl chloride to give 24. N-alkylation of 24 by l-bromo-2-butanone or chloromethylcyclopropyl ketone and subsequent base catalyzed cyclization gives 25 which is acylated by aroyl halide to give 26. Hydrolysis of the ester function of 26 followed by acidification forms an acid which is thermally decarboxylated to give 27. Reduction of the ketone function of 27 by LAH yields indolizines 28. Scheme 3e - Part 2
Figure imgf000077_0001
29a: R≤=Ph 24a: R^OBn 31a: Rι=H, R2=Ph b: R^cyclo-Hex. b: R^OMe b: R^OBn, R2=Ph
30a- R1=H c: Rι=OMe, R2=Ph d: R-ι=OBn, R2=cyclo-Hex
Figure imgf000077_0002
32a: R^H, R2=Ph 33a: R^H, R2=Ph b: Rι=OBn, R2=Ph b: R^OBn, R2=Ph c: R^OMe, R2=Ph c: R-|=OBn, R2=cyclo-Hex d: Rι=OBn, R2=cyclo-Hex
Heating a mixture of 3-bromo-4-phenyl-butan-2-one or 3-bromo-4-cyclohexyl-butan-2-one and ethyl pyridine-2- acetate, or a substituted derivative, in the presence of base yields indolizine 31. Treatment of 31 with aqueous base in DMSO at elevated temperature followed by acidification gives 32 which is thermally decarboxylated to 33.
Scheme 4e - Part 1
Figure imgf000078_0001
36a-l 37a-d,f-k: R5= =Et 38a: R5='BU
39d,i,k, I: R5= Me
Figure imgf000078_0002
f Me Me Et o-Ph-Ph g H H Me Ph h H H Et m-CI-Ph i H H Et m-CF3-Ph j H H Et 1 -Naphthyl k H H cyclo Pr o-Ph-Ph
1 H H Me cyclo-Hex
Sequential treatment of 28 or 33 with oxalyl chloride and ammonium hydroxide forms 35 which is debenzylated by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give 36. Indolizines 36 are O-alkylated using sodium hydride and bromoacetic acid esters to form 37, 38, or 39 which are converted to indolizines 40 by hydrolysis with aqueous base followed by acidification. Scheme 4e - Part 2
Figure imgf000079_0001
41 42
The O-alkylation of 36h produces nitrile 41 which is converted to 42 on reaction with trialkyltin azide.
S cheme 5 e
Figure imgf000080_0001
Br"
46a-e 5a-e
Figure imgf000080_0002
a-m, o-w
45, 46 Ri R2 47-52 R2 R3 a Bn Et a-o Bn Et a-o (see below) b Me Et P Bn Me 1-adamantyl c Bn Me q Bn Me o-biphenyl d: Me cyclo-Pro r Bn cycloPro phenyl e: Bn cyclo-Pro s Me Et p-n-C^g-Ph t Bn Me cyclo-Hex u Me cycloPro cyclo-Hex
V Bn cycloPro cyclopentyl w Bn Me cyclolpentyl
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0002
50a-t, v, w 51a-t, v, w 52a-t, v, w
Figure imgf000081_0003
48a-t 49a-t
Figure imgf000081_0004
50a-t 51a-t 52a-t
47-52 R3=
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000082_0002
m trans
Figure imgf000082_0003
nC5Hn
The hydroxypyridme is O-alkylated to give 44 which is heated with 2-haloketones to produce 45. Treatment of 45 with base causes cyclization to 46 which on heating with acid chlorides yields acylmdolizmes 47 which are reduced by aluminum hydride to the corresponding alkylmdolizines 48. Sequential treatment of 48 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 49. Cleavage of the ether functionality of 49 yields 50. The oxyacetic ester derivatives 51 are formed by O-alkylation of 50 and then hydrolyzed to the oxyacetic acids 52. Scheme 6e - Part 1
Figure imgf000083_0001
R2CH2X
54,55 Ri R2 a: Me o-biphenyl b: Et o-biphenyl c: iPro o-biphenyl d: cyclo-Pro cyclohexyl e: tBu o-biphenyl f: cyclopenty o-biphenyll
Figure imgf000083_0002
57a,c,e-k 58a,c,e-k
-58 Ri R2 Ri R2 a Me o-biphenyl f cyclopentyl o-biphenyl b Et o-biphenyl g Et m-biphenyl c iPr o-biphenyl h Et cinnamyl d cycloPro o-biphenyl i Et phenethyl e tBu o-biphenyl j cyclopropyl 1 -naphthyl k cyclopropyl cyclohexyl
Figure imgf000084_0001
59a-k
59a-k R=
a: -ONa b: -OCH(Me)OCOOMe c: -OCH(Me)OCOOiPr d: -OCH2OCOtBu
e: - OCH ( Me ) f :- OCH ( Me ) OCOO-Q g : - OCH ( e ) OCO-Q
Figure imgf000084_0002
h: -OCH (Me ) OCO-Q i:-0 ( CH2 ) 2N^ C) j: -(CH2)20- (dimer) k: COEt
HCI
Pyridine 43 is O-alkylated to produce 53. Heating 53 with 2-haloketones gives intermediate N-alkylated pyridinium compounds which are cyclized to 54 on treatment with base. Heating 54 with acyl chlorides gives the acylindolizines 55 which are reduced to the alkylindolizines 56 by sodium borohydride-aluminum chloride. Alternatively, 56 are produced by C-alkylation of 54 using alkyl halides. Sequential treatment of 56 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 57 which are hydrolyzed to produce 58. Compound 58b is converted to its sodium salt 59a which yields 59b-k on reaction with the appropriate alkyl halide. Scheme 6e - Part 2
Figure imgf000085_0001
36d 591-p
591-p R=
Figure imgf000085_0002
0: " Π p:
^N 0
Compound 36b is O-alkylated to give 591-p.
Scheme 7e
Figure imgf000085_0003
62a"d 63a-d
Figure imgf000086_0001
LiOH ,
Figure imgf000086_0002
Figure imgf000086_0003
66a-d 67a-d
62-67 R1 R2
a: Et Ph b: cyclo Pro o-Ph-Ph c: Et o-Ph-Ph d: Et cyclohexyl
Pyridine 60 is N-alkylated by 2-haloketones to produce intermediate pyridinium compounds which are cyclized by base to give 61. Reaction of 61 with acyl chlorides produces 62 which are reduced to 63 by tert butylamine-borane and aluminum chloride. Sequential treatment of 63 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia yields 64 which are O-demethylated by BBr3 to give 65. The sodium salt of 65 is reacted with ethyl 4-bromobutyrate to give 66 which is hydrolyzed to the acid 67.
S cheme 8 e
Figure imgf000087_0001
Compounds 36d and 65c are O-alkylated by omega- bromocarboxylic esters to give 68 which are hydrolyzed to the acids 69. Compounds 36d and 65c produce 70 on treatment with propiolactone and base.
S cheme 9e
(
Figure imgf000087_0002
66c 71a: R=Et b: R=H
Compounds 66 are reduced to 71 by tert-butylamine- borane and aluminum chloride. Scheme lOe
1)CS2
Figure imgf000088_0001
COOEt
2) f COOEt
Br"
44b 72
Br COOEt KOtBu
COOEt Et ►
DBU
Figure imgf000088_0002
Figure imgf000088_0003
tuted b: 6-substituted
Figure imgf000088_0004
75a,b 76 77 a: 8-substituted b: 6-substituted
Figure imgf000088_0005
BBr3 BrCH2COOMe
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000089_0002
Figure imgf000089_0003
82 83
Pyridine 44b reacts with ethyl bromoacetate to produce 72 which is treated with CS2 and base and then with ethyl acrylate to form 73. Reaction of 73 with base and ethyl bromoacetate yields a mixture of regioisomers 74a+b, 6- and 8-benzyloxy compounds. Base treatment of 74a+b eliminates ethyl acrylate to form 75 which is separated from the isomer of 6-benzyloxy derivative and S-alkylated to give 76. Hydrolysis of 76 forms 77 which is thermally decarboxylated to yield 78. Compound 78 is C-alkylated to form 79 which on sequential treatment with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia forms 80. Ether cleavage of 80 gives 81 whose sodium salt is alkylated by methyl bromoacetate to form 82 which are hydrolyzed to acids 83. Scheme l ie - Part 1
NH2
Figure imgf000090_0001
86
84 85
Figure imgf000090_0002
89a-b 90a-b
Aminopicoline 84 is converted to its N-CBZ derivative 85 whose anion is alkylated by methyl bromoacetate to produce 86. Reaction of 86 with methyl alpha-bromoalkyl ketones in the presence of base yields 87. Sequential treatment of 87 with oxalyl chloride and then ammonia gives 88 which is converted to 89 by hydrogenolysis of the N-CBZ function. Hydrolysis of 89 yields acids 90.
Scheme l ie - Part 2
Figure imgf000091_0001
88a
Figure imgf000091_0002
Compounds 88 are reduced by tert-butylamine-borane and aluminum chloride to 91 which are hydrolyzed to acids 92.
Scheme 12e
Figure imgf000091_0003
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000092_0002
Pyridine 24 is N-alkylated by methyl bromoacetate, cyclized with base, and o-methylated using dimethysulfate to give 94. Hydrolysis of the ester function of 94 followed by thermal decarboxylation yields 2-methoxy-8- benzyloxyindolizine which is C-alkylated at position 3 and then reacted sequentially with oxalyl chloride and ammonia to produce 95. Hydrogenolysis of the 8-benzyloxy group followed by O-alkylation gives 96 which is hydrolyzed to 97.
f) Indene SPLΑ2 inhibitors as described in US Patent Application 08/776618 filed July 20 1995, (titled, Synovial Phospholipase A2 Inhibitor Compounds having an Indene Type Nucleus, Pharmaceutical Formulations Containing said Compounds, and Therapeutic Methods of Using Said Compounds"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, are useful in practicing the method of the invention. The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of an indene-1-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (If);
Figure imgf000093_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rx is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgo' where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group); wherein ~(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
Suitable indene compounds also include the following: An indene-1-acetic acid hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ilf);
Figure imgf000094_0001
wherein :
X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
R3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-RgQ,- where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgg is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (C -C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group); wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
Suitable indene compounds for use in the method of the invention also include the following:
An indene-1-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Illf);
Figure imgf000095_0001
X is oxygen or sulfur;
R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C -C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgn; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group); wherein - ( a)- , is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
The method of making the indene compounds is as follows:
Scheme-lf
Figure imgf000097_0001
6a:6-OMe, Ra=Me 6b:7-OMe, ^Me 6c:7-O e, Ra=Et
OEt
Figure imgf000097_0002
7a 8b,c 8b:7-OMe, R^Me 8c:7-OMe, Ra=Et
Figure imgf000097_0003
8b,c 9b,c 7b,c
Figure imgf000097_0004
CHC
A mixture of an anisaldehyde 1, propionic anhydride, and sodium propionate is heated to produce 2 which is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give 3. Acid cyclization of 3 yields 6. Alternatively, the aromatic position para to the methoxy group of 3 is blocked by bromination to give 4 which is cyclized to 5 by acid and then debrominated using hydrogen and Pd/C to give 6. Reaction of 6 with the anion of triethyl phosphonoacetate produces 7 and/or 8. Radical bromination of 8 gives 9, which on reduction with hydrogen in the presence of Ptθ2 yields 7. Alternatively, treatment of 8 with acid gives 7
Scheme-2f
Figure imgf000098_0001
7a-c 10a-j 11a-j
Figure imgf000098_0002
12a-j 13a-j
Figure imgf000098_0003
14a-j
Figure imgf000099_0001
a R=Ph Ra=Me 6-R 0 n=3 b R=Ph Ra=Me 7-Rb0 n=1 c R=Ph Ra=Et 7-Rb0 n=1 d R=o-Ph-Ph Ra=Et 7-R 0 n=1 e R=o-Bn-Ph Ra=Et 7-R 0 n=1 f R=m-CI-Ph Ra=Et 7-R 0 π=1 g R=o,m-di-CI-Ph Ra=Et 7-R 0 n=1 h R=m-CF3-Ph Ra=Et 7-R 0 n=1 i R=1-Naphthyl Ra=Et 7-Rb0 n=1 j R=2-Naphthyl Ra=Et 7-Rb0 n=1 where Rb is - ( CH2 ) nCOOH
Compound 7 is condensed with benzaldehyde and its derivatives in the presence of base to give 10. Indenes 10 are converted to an active ester using benzotriazo-1- yloxytris (dimethylamino) hexafluorophosphonate and then reacted with ammonium hydroxide to form 11. Demethylation of 11 with BBr3 forms 12 which is O-alkylated using sodium hydride and an omega-bromoalkanoic acid ester to produce 13. Aqueous base hydrolysis of 13 yields 14.
S cheme- 3 f
Figure imgf000100_0001
12c 15
Figure imgf000100_0002
16b 17b
Compound 12c is O-alkylated using sodium hydride and methylbromoacetate to product 15 which is reduced by hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C to give a mixture of isomers 16a and 16b. Aqueous base hydrolysis of 16a and 16b gives 17a and 17b respectively.
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000101_0002
19 20
Compound lOd is treated with lithium diisopropylamine, then air is bubbled into the solution to give 18. The indene 18 is converted to an active ester using benzotriazo- 1-yloxytris (dimethylamino) hexafluorophosphonate and then reacted with ammonium hydroxide to form the hydroxy acetamide 19. Compound 19 is oxidized to 20 using N-methylmorpholine N-oxide in the presence of tetrapropylammonium perruthenate .
g) Carbazole and tetrahydrocarbazole SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making these compounds are set out in United States Patent Application SN 09/063066 filed April 21, 199Σ (titled, "Substituted Carbazoles and 1,2,3,4- Tetrahydrocarbazoles") , the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The method of the invention includes treatment of a mammal with these compounds . The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount carbazole or tetrahydrocarbazole represented by the following:
A compound of the formula (Ie)
Figure imgf000102_0001
wherein;
A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position; one of B or D is nitrogen and the other is carbon;
Z is cyclohexenyl, phenyl, pyridyl, wherein the nitrogen is at the 1-, 2-, or 3-position, or a 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-,
2- or 3-position, and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or
4-position;
is a double or single bond; R20 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is - (C5-C20) lkyl, - (C5-C o) alkenyl,
(C5-C20) alkynyl, carbocyclic radicals, or heterocyclic radicals, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-R80; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms selected from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur; wherein the combination of atoms in -(L)- are selected from the group consisting of (i) carbon and hydrogen only, (ii) one sulfur only, (iii) one oxygen only, (iv) one or two nitrogen and hydrogen only, (v) carbon, hydrogen, and one sulfur only, and (vi) and carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen only; and where R^O is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R^l is a non-interfering substituent;
RI' is -NHNH2, -NH2 or -CONH2; R2' is selected from the group consisting of -OH, and
-0(CH„) R5' where
R5' is H, -CN, -NH2, -CONH2, -CONR9R10 -NHS02R15;
-CONHS02R15, where R15 is - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl or -CF3; phenyl or phenyl substituted with -CO2H or -CO2 (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl; and - (La) - (acidic group), wherein
-(La)- is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 7 and t is 1-5;
R3 ' is selected from non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radicals, carbocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radicals, and heterocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tauto er, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof; provided that; when R^ ' is H, R^O χs benzyl and m is 1 or
2; R2 ' cannot be -0(CH2)mH; and provided that when D is nitrogen, the heteroatom of Z is selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-, 2- or 3-position and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or
4-position .
Preferred in the practice of the method of the invention are compounds represented by the formula (lie):
Figure imgf000104_0001
wherein;
Z is cyclohexenyl, or phenyl; R21 is a non-interfering substituent;
R1 is -NHNH2 or -NH2;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and
-0(CH2)m R5 where
0 _ll 6 7
R5 is H, -C0 H, -CONH2, -C02(Cχ-C4 alkyl); _P(R R ) , here R^ and R^ are each independently -OH or
-0(Cχ_C4) alkyl; -SO3H, -SO3 (Cχ-C4 alkyl), tetrazolyl, -CN, -NH2, -NHS02R15; -C0NHS02R15, where R15 is
- (C, -C P alkyl or -CF,, phenyl or phenyl substituted with -C02H or -CO„ (C., -C. ) alkyl where m is 1-3; R3 is H, -0(Cχ-C4) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ_Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF3; -CH2OSi (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -CONH2, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and R^O are independently - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; R^ is H, - (C5-CX4) alkyl, - (C3-CX4 ) cycloalkyl, pyridyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo, -CF3, -OCF3, - (Cχ-C4) alkoxy, -CN, - (Cχ-C ) alkylthio, phenyl (CI-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl, phenyl, phenoxy or naphthyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt, thereof .
Preferred specific compounds including all salts and prodrug derivatives thereof, for practicing the method of the invention are as follows:
9-benzyl-5, 7-dimethoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4- carboxylic acid hydrazide; 9-benzyl-5, 7-dimethoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4- carboxamide; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-
5-yl] oxyacetic acid sodium salt; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxycarbazol-5-yl] oxyacetic acid; methyl [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxycarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5-cyanomethyloxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( 1H-tetrazol-5-yl-methyl) oxy)-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide;
{ 9- [ (phenyl ) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (phenyl ) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2- (4-trifluoromethylphenyl) - carbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-5- ( 2-methanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-7-methoxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide;
9-benzyl-4- (2-methanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-2- methoxycarbazole-5-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-4- (2-trifluoromethanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-2- methoxycarbazole-5-carboxamide; -benzyl-5-methanesulfonamidoylmethyloxy-7-methoxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; -benzyl-4-methanesulfonamidoylmethyloxy-carbazole-5- carboxamide; [5-carbamoyl-2-pentyl-9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2- ( 1-methylethyl) -9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (tri (-1- methylethyl) silyl) oxymethyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2-phenyl-9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid [ 5-carbamoyl-2- (4-chlorophenyl) -9-
(phenylmethyl) carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2- (2-furyl) -9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (tri (-1- methylethyl) silyl) oxymethyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid, lithium salt; { 9- [ (phenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-phenoxyphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- t (2-Fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-trifluoromethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-benzylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (3-trifluoromethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ ( 1-naphthyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-cyanophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-cyanophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl}oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl}oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3, 5-dimethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (3-iodophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-Chlorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2 , 3-difluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2, 6-difluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl} oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2 , 6-dichlorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl}oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (3-trifluoromethoxyphenyl) ethyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-biphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-Biphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; the { 9- [ (2-Biphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; [ 9-Benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbaole-5- yl] oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (2-Pyridyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-Pyridyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-methyl-l, 2,3, -tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-methylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-fluoro-1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid;
[ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-fluorocarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; t 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-chloro-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-chlorocarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9- [ (Cyclohexyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9- [ (Cyclopentyl ) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; 5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ [ (propen-3- yl) oxy] methyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid;
[5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (propyloxy) methyl] carbazol-
4-yl] oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( (carboxamidomethyl) oxy) -1,2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5-cyanomethyloxy-carbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( (lH-tetrazol-5-yl-methyl) oxy) - carbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( (carboxamidomethyl) oxy) -carbazole-4- carboxamide; and [ 9-Benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbaole-5- yl] oxyacetic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt, thereof .
Other desireable carbazole compounds suitable for practicing the method of thein invention are selected from those represented by the formula (XXX) :
Figure imgf000109_0001
(XXX)
wherein :
R1 is -NHNH2, or -NH2;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and -
0(CH ) mmR5 where
0 D-, . „ _ „ _ ,„„ „ -P(R6R7) is H, -C02H, -C0 (C1-C4 alkyl); " '"' " ' , where R6 and R^ are each independently -OH or -0 (C1-C4 ) alkyl; -SO3H, -S03(Cχ-C4 alkyl), tetrazolyl, -CN, -NH2' -NHSO2R15; -CONHS02R15, where R15 is - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl or -CF3, phenyl or phenyl substituted with -C02H or -CO2 (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl where m is 1-3;
R3 is H, -0(Cχ-C4) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl,
- (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ_Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF3; -CH2OSi (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -CONH2, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and - are independently - (Cχ-C ) alkyl or
-phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; R4 is H, - (C5-CX4) alkyl, - (C3-C14 ) cycloalkyl, pyridyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo,
-CF3, -OCF3 , - (Cχ-C ) alkoxy, -CN, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, phenyl (CI-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl, phenyl, phenoxy or naphthyl; A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-,
6-, 7- or 8-position; Z is cyclohexenyl, phenyl, pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 1-, 2- or 3-position or a 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-, 2- or 3-position and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or 4- position, or wherein one carbon on the heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with =0; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof; provided that one of A or Z is a heterocyclic ring.
Further desirable specific compounds suitable for the method of the invention are selected from the following:
(R, 5) - (9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l-oxo-3-thia-l,2, 3,4- tetrahydrocarbazol-5-yl) oxyacetic acid; { R, S) - ( 9-benzyl-4- carbamoyl-l-oxo-3-thia-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl) oxyacetic acid; [N-benzyl-l-carbamoyl-l-aza-1, 2, 3, 4- tetrahydrocarbazol-8-yl] oxyacetic acid; 4-methoxy-6- methoxycarbonyl-10-phenylmethyl-6, 7,8,9- tetrahydropyrido [1, 2-a] indole; (4-carboxamido-9- phenylmethyl-4 , 5-dihydrothiopyrano [3, 4-b] indol-5- yl) oxyacetic acid; 3, 4-dihydro-4-carboxamidol-5-methoxy-9- phenylmethylpyrano [3, 4-b] indole; 2- [(2, 9 bis-benzyl-4- carbamoyl-1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydro-beta-carbolin-5-yl) oxy] acetic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof . Particularly preferred compounds for the treatment of cystic fibrosis are represented by the formulae (Xe) and (Xle) below:
Figure imgf000111_0001
and
Figure imgf000112_0001
For all of the above compounds of the carbazole or tetrahydrocarbazole type it is advantageous to use them in their (i)acid form, or (ii) pharmaceutically acceptable (e.g., Na, K) form, or (iii) and prodrugs derivatives (e.g., methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-butyl ester, morpholino ethyl ester) .
Prodrugs are derivatives of SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention which have chemically or metabolically cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and base derivative forms, but the acid derivative form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985) . Prodrugs include acid derivatives well known to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acidic compound with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a suitable amine . Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters derived from acidic groups pendent on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy) alkyl esters or ( (alkoxycarbonyl) oxy) alkyl esters. Specific preferred prodrugs are ester prodrugs inclusive of methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, sec-butyl, tert-butyl ester, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester, and morpholino-N-ethyl ester. Methods of making ester prodrugs are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326. Additional methods of prodrug synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063280 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, N, N-diethylglycolamido ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063646 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Morpholino-N-ethyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole sPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference; and US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/063284 filed October 27, 1997 (titled, Isopropyl Ester Prodrugs of Indole SPL 2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Carbazole and tetrahydrocarbazole SPLA2 inhibitor compounds useful for practicing the method of the invention may be made by the following general methods:
The compounds of formula Ie where Z is cyclohexene are prepared according to the following reaction Schemes Ig(a)and (c) .
Scheme Ig (a)
Figure imgf000114_0001
wherein ;
R1 is -NH2, R3(a) is H, -0 (Cχ-C ) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C -C4 ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF ; -CH 0Si (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl,
- (Cχ-Cg)alkoxy (Cχ-Cg)alkyl, - (Cχ-Cg) alkoxy (Cχ_ Cg) alkenyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -C0NH , -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and R10 are independently hydrogen, -CF3, phenyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; when R1 is -NHNH , R3(a) is H, -0 (Cχ-C ) alkyl, halo,
- (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo or -CF3; -CH 0Si (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl,
- (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl, - (Cχ-Cg) alkoxy (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, - (Cχ-Cg) alkoxy (Cχ-Cg) alkenyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and R10 are independently hydrogen, -CF3, phenyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; R2 (a) is -OCH3 or -OH.
An appropriately substituted nitrobenzene (1) can be reduced to the aniline (2) by treatment with a reducing agent, such as hydrogen in the presence of Pd/C, preferably at room temperature.
Compound (2) is N-alkylated at temperatures of from about 0 to 20 °C using an alkylating agent such as an appropriately substituted aldehyde and sodium cyanoborohydride to form (3) . Alternately, an appropriately substituted benzyl halide may be used for the first alkylation step. The resulting intermediate is further N-alkylated by treatment with 2-carbethoxy-6- bromocyclohexanone, preferably at temperatures of about
80 °C to yield (4) or by treatment with potassium hexamethyldisilazide and the bromoketoester .
The product (4) is cyclized to the tetrahydrocarbazole (5) by refluxing with ZnCl2 in benzene for from about 1 to 2 days, preferably at 80 °C. (Ref 1) .
Compound (5) is converted to the hydrazide (6) by treatment with hydrazine at temperatures of about 100 °C, or to the amide (7) by reacting with methylchloroaluminum amide in benzene. (Ref 2) Alternatively, (7) may be produced by treatment of (6) with Raney nickel active catalyst .
It will be readily appreciated that when R3(a) is:
0 II
- (CH2)nCO(C1-C4 alkyl), conversion to the amide will also be achieved in this procedure .
Compounds (6) and (7) may be dealkylated, preferably at 0 °C to room temperature, with a dealkylating agent, such as boron tribromide or sodium thioethoxide, to give compound (7) where R2 (a) is -OH, which may then be further converted to compound (9), by realkylating with a base, such as sodium hydride, and an alkylating agent, such as Br(CH2) R^, where R^ is the carboxylate or phosphonic diester or nitrile as defined above. Conversion of R2 to the carboxylic acid may be accomplished by treatment with an aqueous base. When R2 is nitrile, conversion to the tetrazole may be achieved by reacting with tri-butyl tin azide or conversion to the carboxamide may be achieved by reacting with basic hydrogen peroxide. When R2 is the phosphonic diester, conversion to the acid may be achieved by reacting with a dealkylating agent such as trimethylsilyl bromide. The monoester may be accomplished by reacting the diester with an aqueous base.
When R2 and R3 are both methoxy, selective demethylation can be achieved by treating with sodium ethanethiolate in dimethylformamide at 100 °C.
Ref 1 Julia, M.; Lenzi, J. Preparation d' acides tetrahydro-1, 2 , 3, 4-carbazole-l ou -4. Bull . Soc . Chim . France, 1962, 2262-2263.
Ref 2 Levin, J.I.; Turos, E.; Weinreb, S.M. An alternative procedure for the aluminum-mediated conversion of esters to amides. Syn . Comm . , 1982, 12, 989-993.
An alternative synthesis of intermediate (5) is shown in Scheme 1(b), as follows.
Scheme Ig(b)
Figure imgf000117_0001
[ 2 ) : ' )
Figure imgf000117_0002
where PG is a protecting group;
R3a is as defined in Scheme 1, above The aniline (2) is N-alkylated with 2-carbethoxy- 6-bromocyclohexanone in dimethyl formamide in the presence of sodium bicarbonate for 8-24 hours at 50 °C . Preferred protecting groups include methyl, carbonate, and silyl groups, such as t-butyldimethylsilyl . The reaction product (4') is cyclized to (5') using the ZnCl2 in benzene conditions described in Scheme 1(a), above. N-alkylation of (5') to yield (5) is accomplished by treatment with sodium hydride and the appropriate alkyl halide in dimethylformamide at room temperature for 4-8 hours.
Scheme Ilg
Figure imgf000118_0001
R3(a) is as defined in Scheme Ic As discussed in Scheme I above, carbazole (5) is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid (10) by treatment with an aqueous base, preferably at room temperature to about 100 °C . The intermediate is then converted to an acid chloride utilizing, for example, oxalyl chloride and dimethylformamide, and then further reacted with a lithium, salt of (S) or (R) -4-alkyl-2-oxazolidine at a temperature of about -75 °C, to give (11a) and (lib), which are separable by chromatography. The diastereomers are converted to the corresponding enantiomeric benzyl esters (12) by brief treatment at temperatures of about 0 °C to room temperature with lithium benzyl oxide. (Ref 3) The esters (12) are then converted to (7) preferably by treatment with methylchloroaluminum amide (Ref 2, above) or, alternately, by hydrogenation using, for example, hydrogen and palladium on carbon, as described above, to make the acid and then reacting with an acyl azide, such as diphenylphosphoryl azide followed by treatment with ammonia. Using the procedure described above in Scheme I, compound (9a) or (9b) may be accomplished.
Ref 3 Evans, D.A.; Ennis, M.D.; Mathre, D.J. Asymmetric alkylation reactions of chiral imide enolates. A practical approach to the enantioselective synthesis of alpha- substituted carboxylic acid derivatives. J. Am . Chem . Soc . , 1982, 104, 1737-1738.
Compounds of formula Ie where Z is phenyl can be prepared as follows in Schemes III (a) -(f), below. Scheme III (a)
Figure imgf000120_0001
( 13 : : i 4 )
A 1, 2 , 3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide or 4-carboxhydrazide (13) is dehydrogenated by refluxing in a solvent such as carbitol in the presence of Pd/C to produce the carbazole-4-carboxamide . Alternately, treatment of (13) with DDQ in an appropriate solvent such as dioxane yields carbozole (14).
Depending on the substituent pattern oxidation as described above may result in de-alkylation of the nitrogen. For example when R3 is substituted at the 8- position with methyl, oxidation results in dealkylation of the nitrogen which may be realkylated by treatment with sodium hydride and the appropriate alkyl halide as described in Scheme I (a) above to prepare the deired product (14 ) .
Figure imgf000121_0001
(15) (16) (25)
,
Figure imgf000121_0002
(26) (19)
Figure imgf000121_0003
(20) (21)
Figure imgf000121_0004
(22) (23)
defined in Scheme I(a)above cid protecting group
Figure imgf000121_0005
(24) Benzoic acid derivative (16) where X is preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine and the protecting group is preferably -CH3, are reduced to the corresponding aniline (25) with a reducing agent, such as stannous chloride in the presence of acid under the general conditions of Sakamoto et al, Chem Pharm. Bull. 35 (5), 1823-1828 (1987).
Alternatively, reduction with sodium dithionite in the presence of a base, such as sodium carbonate in a noninterferring solvent, such as water, ethanol, and/or tetrahydrofuran affords starting material (16).
Alternatively, reduction by hydrogenation over a sulfided platinum catalyst supported on carbon with hydrogen at 1 to 60 atmospheres in a noninterfering solvent, preferably ethyl acetate, to form a starting material (16) . The reactions are conducted at temperatures from about 0 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and are substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions .
The aniline (25) and dione (15) are condensed under dehydrating conditions, for example, using the general procedure of Iida, et al., (Ref 5), with or without a noninterfering solvent, such as toluene, benzene, or methylene chloride, under dehydrating conditions at a temperature about 10 to 150 °C . The water formed in the process can be removed by distillation, azetropic removal via a Dean-Stark apparatus, or the addition of a drying agent, such as molecular sieves, magnesium sulfate, calcium carbonate, sodium sulfate, and the like.
The process can be performed with or without a catalytic amount of an acid, such a p-toluenesulfonic acid or methanesulfonic acid. Other examples of suitable catalysts include hydrochloric acid, phenylsulfonic acid, calcium chloride, and acetic acid. Examples of other suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, methanol, ethanol, 1,1,2,2- tetrachloroethane, chlorobenzene, bromobenzene, xylenes, and carbotetrachloride . The condensation of the instant process is preferably carried out neat, at a temperature about 100 to 150 °C with the resultant water removed by distillation via a stream of inert gas, such as, nitrogen or argon.
The reaction is substantially complete in about 30 minutes to 24 hours.
Intermediate (26) may then be readily cyclized in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(0Ac)2 or Pd(PPh3)4 and the like, a phosphine, preferably a trialkyl- or triarylphosphine, such as triphenylphosphine, tri-o- tolylphosphine , or tricyclohexylphosphine, and the like, a base, such as, sodium bicarbonate, triethylamine, or diisopropylethylamine, in a noninterfering solvent, such as, acetonitrile, triethylamine, or toluene at a temperature about 25 to 200°C to form (19) . Examples of other suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, benzene, dimethylsulfoxide, or dimethylformamide .
Examples of other suitable palladium catalysts include Pd(PPh3)Cl2, Pd(OCOCF3)2, [ (CH3C6H ) 3P] 2PdCl2, [ (CH3CH2)3P]2PdCl2, [ (C6Hχχ ) 3P] 2PdCl2 , and [ (C6H5) 3P] 2PdBr2 • Examples of other suitable phosphines include triisopropylphosphine, triethylphosphine, tricyclopentylphosphine, 1, 2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethane, 1, 3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, and 1,4- bis (diphenylphosphino) butane .
Examples of other suitable bases include tripropyl amine, 2, 2, 6, 6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1,5- diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) , 1,8- diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene (DBU), 1,5- diazabicyclo [4.3.0] non-5-ene, (DBN) sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, and potassium bicarbonate.
The cyclization of the instant process is preferably carried out with palladium (II ) acetate as catalyst in the presence of either triphenylphosphine, tri-o- tolylphosphine, 1, 3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, or tricyclohexylphosphine in acetonitrile as solvent and triethylamine as base at a temperature about 50 to 150 °C . The reaction is substantially complete in about 1 hour to 14 days.
Alternatively, a preferred process for cyclization consists of the reaction of intermediate (26) with a palladacycle catalyst such as trans-di (μ-acetato) -bis [ o- (di- o-tolylphosphino) benzyl] dipalladium (II) in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide (DMAC) at 120-140 °C in the presence of a base such as sodium acetate.
Intermediate (19) may be alkylated with an alkylating agent XCH2R4, where X is halo in the presence of a base to form (20) . Suitable bases include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lithium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, lithium hydride, and Triton B (N-benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) . The reaction may or may not be carried out in the presence of a crown ether. Potassium carbonate and Triton B are preferred. The amount of alkylating agent is not critical, however, the reaction is best accomplished using an excess of alkyl halide relative to the starting material. A catalytic amount of an iodide, such as sodium iodide or lithium iodide may or may not be added to the reaction mixture. The reaction is preferably carried out in an organic solvent, such as, acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, or acetonitrile. Other suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether.
The reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions. Optionally, a phase transfer reagent such as tetrabutylammonium bromide or tetrabutylammonium chloride may be employed.
Intermediate (20) May by dehydrogenated by oxidation with 2, 3-dichloro-5, 6-dicyano-l, 4-benzoquinone in a noninterfering solvent to form (21) .
Suitable solvents include methylene chloride, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, diethyl ether, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether. Toluene, benzene, dioxane, and tetrahydrofuran are preferred solvents. The reaction is carried out at a temperature about 0 to 120 °C . Temperatures from 50 to 120 °C are preferred. The reaction is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions . Intermediate (21) may be aminated with ammonia in the presence of a noninterfering solvent to form a (22) . Ammonia may be in the form of ammonia gas or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium hydroxide, ammonium acetate, ammonium trifluoroacetate, ammonium chloride, and the like. Suitable solvents include ethanol, methanol, propanol, butanol, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and water. A mixture of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide and tetrahydrofuran or methanol is preferred for the instant process. The reaction is carried out at a temperature about 20 to 100 °C . Temperatures from 50 to 60 °C are preferred. The reaction is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions . Alkylation of (22) is achieved by treatment with an alkylating agent of the formula XCH2R^ where X is halo and R70 is -CO2R71, -SO3R71 , -P (0) (OR71 ) 2 , or -P (0) (OR71) H, where R71 is an acid protecting group or a prodrug function, in the presence of a base in a noninterfering solvent to form (23) . Methyl bromoacetate and t-butyl bromoacetate are the preferred alkylating agents.
Suitable bases include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lithium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, lithium hydride, and Triton B (N-benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) . The reaction may or may not be carried out in the presence of a crown ether. Cesium carbonate and Triton B are preferred.
The amount of alkylating agent is not critical, however, the reaction is best accomplished using an excess of alkyl halide relative to the starting material. The reaction is preferably carried out in an organic solvent, such as, acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, or acetonitrile. Other suitable solvents include tetrahydrofuran, methyl ethyl ketone, and t-butyl methyl ether .
The reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100 °C . preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions. Optionally, a phase transfer reagent such as tetrabutylammonium bromide or tetrabutylammonium chloride may be employed. Intermediate (23) may be optionally hydrolyzed with a base or acid to form desired product (24) and optionally salified.
Hydrolysis of (23) is achieved using a base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, aqueous potassium carbonate, aqueous sodium carbonate, aqueous lithium carbonate, aqueous potassium bicarbonate, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, aqueous lithium bicarbonate, preferably sodium hydroxide and a lower alcohol solvent, such as, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and the like. Other suitable solvents include acetone, tetrahydrofuran, and dioxane .
Alternatively, the acid protecting group may be removed by organic and inorganic acids, such as trifluoroacetic acid and hydrochloric acid with or without a noninterferring solvent. Suitable solvents include methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and acetone. The t-butyl esters are preferably removed by neat trifluoroacetic acid. The reaction is conducted at temperatures from about -10 to 100°C. preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
The starting material (16) is prepared by esterifying compound (15) with a alkyl halide = XPG; where X is halo and PG is an acid protecting group, in the presence of a base, preferably potassium carbonate or sodium cabonate, in a noninterferring solvent, preferably dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide . The preferred alkyl halide is methyl iodide. The reaction is conducted at temperatures from about 0 to 100°C. preferably at ambient temperature, and is substantially complete in about 1 to 48 hours depending on conditions.
Alternatively the starting material (16) may be prepared by condensation with an alcohol HOPG, where PG is an acid protecting group, in the presence of a dehydrating catalyst such as, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or carbonyl diimidazole . In addition, U.S. Patent No. 4,885,338 and Jpn . Kokai Tokkyo Koho 05286912, Nov 1993 Hesei teach a method for preparing 2-fluoro-5-methoxyaniline derivatives.
Scheme Illg (c)
Figure imgf000128_0001
( 2 2 ) 1 2 3 ;
Figure imgf000128_0002
( 2 4 )
R is as defined in Scheme IΙIg(b), R3(a) χs as defined in Scheme Ig(a), above; and X is halo.
Benzoic acid derivatives (16) (X= Cl, Br, or I) and boronic acid derivative (27) (either commercially available or readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials) are condensed under the general procedure of Miyaura, et al . , (Ref 8a) or Trecourt, et al . , (Ref 8b) in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(Ph3P)4, a base, such as sodium bicarbonate, in an inert solvent, such as THF, toluene or ethanol, to afford compound (28) .
Compound (28) is converted to the carbazole product (29) by treatment with a trialkyl or triaryl phosphite or phosphine, such as, triethylphosphite or triphenyl phosphine, according to the general procedure of Cadogan, et al . (Ref 6) .
Compound (29) is N-alkylated with an appropriately substituted alkyl or aryl halide XCH2R^ in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, in a noninterfering solvent, such as toluene, dimethylformamide, or dimethylsulfoxide to afford carbazole (30) .
Compound (30) is converted to the corresponding amide (22) by treatment with boron tribromide or sodium thioethoxide, followed by ammonia or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium acetate, in an inert solvent, such as water or alcohol, or with methylchloroalummum amide in an inert solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature between 0 to 110 °C.
When R3(a) χs substituted at the 8-position with chloro, de-alkylation of (30) with boron tribromide results in de-benzylation of the nitrogen as described above. Alkylation may be readily accomplished in a two step process. First, an O-alkylation by treatment with a haloalkyl acetate such as methyl bromo acetate using sodium hydride in tetrahydrofuran, followed by
N-alkylation using for example a base such as sodium hydride and an appropriately substituted alkyl or aryl halide in dimethoxy formamide. Compound (22) can be converted to product carbazole product (24) as described previously in Scheme IΙIg(b) above.
Conversion to the desired prodrug may be accomplished by techniques known to the skilled artisan, such as for example, by treatment with a primary or secondary halide to make an ester prodrug.
Scheme IΙIg(d)
Figure imgf000130_0001
(29) Alternatively, reduction of the nitro group of compound (28) with a reducing agent, such as hydrogen in the presence of palladium on carbon, in a noninterfering solvent, such as ethanol, at 1 to 60 atmospheres, at a temperature of 0 to 60°C affords the corresponding aniline (32) . Compound (32) is converted to the carbazole (29) according to the general procedure described by Trecourt, et al . (Ref 8b) . The aniline is treated with sulfuric acid and sodium nitrite, followed by sodium azide to form an intermediate azide which is cyclized to carbazole (29) by heating in an inert sovent, such as toluene. Compound (29) is converted to carbazole product (24) as described previously in Schemes IΙIg(b) and IΙIg(c).
References : 8) a. N. Miyaura, et al . , Synth. Commun. 11, 513 (1981) b. F. Trecourt, et al . , Tetrahedron, 51, 11743 6) 6) J. Cadogan et al . , J. Chem. Soc, 4831 (1965)
Scheme Illg (e)
Figure imgf000131_0001
( 4 0 ! ( 4 i :
Figure imgf000131_0002
In an aprotic solvent, preferably tetrahydrofuran, reduction of (40) is achieved using a reducing agent such as aluminum trihydride. Preferably, the reaction is conducted under inert atmosphere such as nitrogen, at room temperature.
Sulfonylation may be achieved with an appropriate acylating agent in the presence of an acid scavenger such as triethyl amine . Scheme IΙIg(f) activating agent H2NS02R1
Figure imgf000132_0001
( 50
Figure imgf000132_0002
(51 )
In a two-step, one-pot process, intermediate (50), prepared as described in Scheme 1(a) above, is first activated with an activating agent such as carbonyl diimidazole. The reaction is preferably run in an aprotic polar or non-polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran. Acylation with the activated intermediate is accomplished by reacting with H2NSOR1~l in the presence of a base, preferably diazabicycloundecene .
Scheme I I Ig ( g
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000133_0002
Figure imgf000133_0003
( 63 ) ( 64 ;
PG is an acid protecting group;
R22 is (Cχ-C6) alkoxy (Cχ-C6) alkyl is (Cl-C6) alkoxy (Cχ-Cg) alkenyl
Starting material (20) is O-alkylated with an alkyl halide or alkenyl halide, using a base such as NaH, in an aprotic polar solvent preferably anhydrous DMF, at ambient temperature under a nitrogen atmosphere. The process of aromatization from a cyclohexenone functionality to a phenol functionality can be performed by treating the tetrahydrocabazole intermediate (60) with a base such as NaH in the presence of methyl benzenesulfinate in an anhydrous solvent, such as 1,4-dioxane or DMF, to form the ketosulfoxide derivative. Upon heating at about 100 °C for 1-2 hours, the ketosulfoxide derivative (60) is converted to the phenol derivative (61) . Conversion of the ester (61) to the amide (62) can be achieved by treating a solution of (61) in an aprotic polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran with . ammonia gas. Phenolic O-alkylation of (62) with, for example, methyl bromoacetate can be carried out in anhydrous DMF at ambient temperature using CS2CO3 or K2CO3 as a base to form (63) . Desired product (64) can be derived from the basic hydrolysis of ester (63) using LiOH or NaOH as a base in an H2O/CH3OH/THF solution at 50 °C for 1-2 hours.
When R22 is - (Cχ-Cς) alkoxy (Cχ-C6) alkenyl, hydrogenation of the double bond can be performed by treating (63) in THF using Ptθ2 as a catalysis under a hydrogen atmosphere. Desired product can then be derived as described above in Scheme III (g) from the basic hydrolysis of ester (63) using LiOH or NaOH as a base in an H20/CH3OH/THF solution at 50°C for 1-2 hours.
Compounds of formula Ie where the A ring is phenyl and the heteroatom in Z is sulfur, oxygen or nitrogen can be prepared as described in Schemes IV(a)-(f), below.
Scheme Ivg {a)
Figure imgf000135_0001
:ιo3: 104
Figure imgf000135_0002
MeClAlNH2
Figure imgf000135_0003
Figure imgf000135_0004
Figure imgf000135_0005
107' '108'
1. NaOH
2. HC1
Figure imgf000135_0006
(109: PG is an acid protecting group. X is halo.
R (a) is H, -0(Cχ-C4) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (Cχ-C ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ~ Cg) alkyl, halo or -CF3; -CH2OSi (Cχ-C6) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)n R^ where R8 is H, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and R10 are independently - (Cχ-C ) alkyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; An indole-3-acetic ester (101) , Ref 10, is alkylated by treatment with alkalai metal amide and benzyloxymethyl chloride to give (102) which is converted to the alcohol (103) by catalytic hydrogenation. The alcohol is alkylated to provide the formaldehyde acetal (104) which is cyclized by Lewis acid to produce the pyrano [3, 4-b] indole (105). The ester is converted to the amide (106) by methylchloroaluminum amide, and then to the phenol (107) with boron tribromide. The phenol is O-alkylated to give (108) which is hydrolyzed to the acid (109) .
10) Dillard, R. et al . , J, Med Chem. Vol 39, No. 26, 5119-5136.
Scheme IVg ( b )
Figure imgf000137_0001
K2C03 EtOH
Figure imgf000137_0002
PG i s an acid protecting group
W is halo, alkyl or aryl sulfonyl
R3(a) is H, -0(Cχ-C4)alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (Cχ-C ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) lkyl, halo or -CF3; -CH2OSi (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)nR^ where R8 is H, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and R^-0 are independently - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8;
Reaction of this alcohol (103) with aldehyde and acid produces the pyranoindole (110). Conversion of the hydroxyl function of (103) to a halide or sulfate functionality is achieved by treatment with triphenylphosphine and CH3X (where X is a halogen) to make compounds of formula (111) where X is a halide; or by treatment with triethylamine and methanesulfonyl chloride to make the sulfonate. Displacement with the sodium salt of thiol acetic acid gives (114) which in turn is hydrolyzed by base to the thiol (115) which is reacted with an appropriately substituted aldehyde and acid to produce the thiopyranoindoles (116) . Intermediate (111) may also be reacted with sodium azide to give the azido derivative (112) which is reduced by hydrogen catalytically to give the amine which is converted to the carboline (113) with aldehyde and acid. Intermediates (113), (110) and (116) may be
N-alkylated, using sodium hydride and an appropriately substituted alkylhalide XCH2R4.
Scheme Ivg (c)
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000140_0001
(131 )
4-Methoxyindole (117) is converted to the indole acetic acid derivative (118) by alkylation with an epoxy propionate. Treatment of (118) with a brominating reagent affords the mixture of bromo isomers (119) and (120) which give the spiro compound (121) upon basic treatment. Heating (121) with benzyl bromide provides a mixture of the isomeric bromo compounds (122) and (123) which react with potassium thioacetate to give a mixture of isomers from which (124) may be separated. Solvolysis of the thioester produces the thiol (125) which is alkylated to give (126) . Lewis acids convert (126) to the thiopyrano [3, 4-b] indole (127). The ester function is converted to amide using methylchloroaluminum amide, the methyl ether cleaved by boron tribromide, and the product phenol O-alkylated with bromoacetic ester to give (130) which is hydrolyzed to (131) .
Scheme IVg (d)
Figure imgf000142_0001
( 134 ) ( 135)
Figure imgf000142_0002
X is halo ,
R3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) above; and
R is - (CH2)mR5.
Protection of the oxygen by treatment of (132) with tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran or methylene chloride accomplishes (133). Alkylation at the 3-position of the indole (133) is achieved by treatment with n-butyllithum then zinc chloride at temperatures starting at about 10 °C and warming to room temperature, followed by reaction with an appropriate haloalkyl ester such as methyl or ethyl bromoacetate. The reaction is preferably conducted at room temperature in an appropriate aprotic polar solvent such as tetrahydrofuran.
Alkylation of the indole-nitrogen can then be achieved by reacting (134) with a suitable alkyl halide in the presence of potassium bis (trimethylsilyl ) amide to prepare ( 135 ) .
The ester functionality of (135) is converted to a trimethylsilylketene acetal (136) by treatment with potassium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide and trimethylsilyl chloride. Treatment of the ketene acetal (136) with bis (chloromethyl) sulfide and zinc bromide in methylene chloride affords the cyclized product (137) . Conversion to amide (138) can be accomplished by a Weinreb reaction with methylchloroaluminum amide. Removal of the oxygen protecting group with a fluoride source, such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF) , and concommitant reaction of the resulting anion with, for example, ethyl bromoacetate yields the ester (139) . Deprotection of the ester yields the desired acid (140) .
Scheme IVg ( e ]
MeClAlNH2
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000144_0002
Figure imgf000144_0003
) is as described in Scheme 1(a) and R is as described in Scheme IV (d) .
Treatment of the ketene acetal (136) with bis (chloromethyl) ether and zinc bromide in methylene chloride affords the cyclized product (141) . Conversion to amide (142) can be accomplished by a Weinreb reaction with methylchloroaluminum amide. Removal of the oxygen protecting group with a fluoride source, such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride, and concommitant reaction of the resulting anion with ethyl bromoacetate yields the ester (143). Deprotection of the ester yields the desired acid (144) . Scheme IVg(f)
Figure imgf000145_0001
(231) (232)
Figure imgf000145_0002
(236)
Figure imgf000146_0001
(241) (242)
N-alkylation of commercially available 4-methoxy indole (231) under basic conditions using an alkyl halide affords the N-alkyl indole (232) . Acylation with a suitable acid chloride provides the glyoxalate ester product (233) which can be reduced with a variety of hydride reducing agents to give intermediate alcohols (234) . Conversion of the alcohol to a suitable leaving group and displacement with sulfur nucleophiles affords the thioether product (235) . Conversion to the acid chloride and spontaneous cyclization affords the thioketone product (236) . Cleavage of the ester can be effected under basic conditions to give the correponding acid which upon formation of the acid chloride and reaction with an appropriate amine gives the amide product (237) . Cleavage of the methyl ether gives the phenol (238) which can be alkylated under basic conditions using alkyl halides to give the O-alkylated product (239) . Cleavage of the ester under basic conditions gives the desired product (240) . Alternatively, reduction of the benzylic ketone with a hydride reducing agent and subsequent deoxygenation of the resulting alcohol gives the deoxygenated product (244) . Cleavage of the oxyacetic ester proceeds under basic conditions to give the desired oxyacetic acid (242) .
Compounds where Z is an aromatic or heterocyclic ring containing nitrogen can be prepared as described in Schemes Vg(a)-(e), below.
Scheme Vg(a)
Figure imgf000148_0001
(145) (146)
Figure imgf000148_0002
(149) (150)
Substituted haloaniline (145) is condensed with N-benzyl-3- piperidone to provide enamine (146). Ring closure is effected by treatment of (146) with palladium (II) acetate and the resultant product is converted to (147) by treatment with cyanogen bromide. Alkylation of (147) is accomplished by treatment with the appropriate alkyl bromide using sodium hydride as base. Hydrolysis of this N-alkylated product with basic hydrogen peroxide under standard conditions provides (148). Demethylation of (148) is carried out by treatment with boron tribromide in methylene chloride . The resulting phenol (149) is converted by the standard sequence of O-alkylation with methyl bromoacetate in the presence of a base, hydrolysis with hydroxide to provide the intermediate salt which is then protonated in aqueous acid to provide desired δ-carboline (150) .
Scheme Vg(b)
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000149_0002
X is halo,
R is as defined in Scheme IV (d), and
R3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) . Ketene acetal (136), prepared as described in Scheme IV (d), is reacted with benzyl bis (methoxymethyl) amine in the presence of zinc chloride to give the tetrahydro- beta-carboline (151).
Treatment of (151) with lithium hydroxide, neutralization with hydrochloric acid and subsequent treatment with 1- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) -3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and ammonia provides the desilyated amide (152) where R^O χs hydrogen, which can be alkylated with, for example, ethylbromoacetate to give ester ( 153) .
Alternatively, treatment of (115) with the appropriate Weinreb reagent provides amide (152) (R^O is ^t-butyldimethylsilyl) which is desilylated with tetra-n- butylammonium fluoride and alkylated with, for example, ethyl bromoacetate to give ester (153) . Lithium hydroxide-mediated hydrolysis gives acid (154), which may be hydrogenated over an appropriate catalyst in the presence of hydrochloride acid to give the tetrahydro- beta-carboline as the hydrochloride salt (155). Compound
(155) may in turn be aromatized by refluxing in carbitol with palladium on carbon to provide beta-carboline (156) .
Scheme Vg ( c )
Figure imgf000151_0001
l
Figure imgf000151_0002
(164)
X is halo, R is as defined in Scheme IV (d); and R3 (a) is as defined in Scheme I (a) .
In a one-pot reaction, indole (133) is successively treated with one equivalent n-butyllithium, carbon dioxide gas, one equivalent of t_-butyllithium, and l-dimethylamino-2-nitroethene to give (157). Nitroalkene (157) is reduced with lithium aluminum hydride to amine (158), which is cyclized with methyl glyoxylate (Ref. 9) in refluxing ethanol to give tetrahydrocarboline (159). Alkylation of both nitrogens of (159) leads to intermediate (160), which is treated with the appropriate Weinreb reagent to provide amide (161) . Fluoride-assisted desilylation and alkylation with, for example, ethyl iodoacetate gives ester (162), which may be hydrogenated over a suitable catalyst and base-hydrolyzed to give acid (163) . Aromatization of (163) to carboline (164) is achieved by refluxing in carbitol in the presence of palladium-on-carbon .
Reference 9:
Kelley, T. R.; Schmidt, T. E.; Haggerty, J. G. A convenient preparation of methyl and ethyl glyoxylate, Synthesis, 1972, 544-5.
Scheme Vg (d)
Figure imgf000153_0001
(170) (171)
,3
Figure imgf000153_0002
(172) (173)
Figure imgf000153_0003
(178)
Figure imgf000154_0001
MeAlClNH, MeAlClNH,
,3
Figure imgf000154_0002
DF DF-
2 RX/K2C03 2)RX/K2C03
3) -OH 3) NaOH
4)H+
Figure imgf000154_0003
(182) (185)
The commercially available acid (170) is reduced with lithium aluminum hydride, oxidized with pyridinium chlorochromate, and silylated with t^-butyldimethylsilyl chloride to give (171) . Treatment with sodium azide provides azide (172), which is reacted with nitromethane and potassium hydroxide in ethanol, followed by treatment with acetic anhydride and pyridine to give nitroolefin (173) . Heating in xylene induces cyclization to produce indole (174) . Alkylation with, for example, benzyl iodide and sodium hydride gives (175), which is hydrogenated in the presence of palladium-on-carbon to give amine (176) . Acylation with the acid chloride of commercially available oxalacetic acid monoethyl ester gives (177), which is thermally cyclized to lactam (178) . Selective reduction of the lactam carbonyl may be accomplished by treatment with NaBH2S3 to provide amine (179) . Protection of amine (179) with di-t_-butyl dicarbonate and pyridine produces (180), which is converted via the appropriate Weinreb reagent to amide (181) . Fluoride-assisted desilylation, alkylation with, for example, ethyl iodoacetate and potassium carbonate, base hydrolysis, and acid hydrolysis produce the tetrahydro- alpha-carboline (182) .
Alternatively, amine (179) may be aromatized by refluxing in carbitol or some other suitable high boiling solvent to give alpha-carboline (183), which is converted via the appropriate Weinreb reagent to amide (184) .
Fluoride-assisted desilylation, alkylation with ethyl iodoacetate and potassium carbonate, and base hydrolysis as described above provides alpha-carboline (185) . Scheme Vg (e]
Figure imgf000156_0001
(190) (191)
Figure imgf000156_0002
(193)
(192)
Figure imgf000156_0003
1)BTCEAD/Et,0
2) Zn/HOAc
Figure imgf000156_0004
Figure imgf000156_0005
(197)
X is halo
R3(a) j_s as defined above
Scheme V(e) provides δ-carboline (198) by the indicated sequence of reactions. N-alkylation of 2-carboethoxyindole (190) followed by a standard two carbon homologation sequence provides 2- (3-propenoic acid) indoles (194). In this sequence, the condensation of aldehyde (193) with malonic acid utilized a mixture of pyridine and piperidine as the base. After methyl ester formation and hydrogenation
(195), ring closure (196) was effected by treatment with bis (2, 2, 2-trichloroethyl) azodicarboxylate (BTCEAD) followed by zinc in acetic acid. Reduction of the cyclic amide with lithium aluminum hydride followed by treatment with trimethylsilylisocyanate provided the urea (197). Conversion to the desired d-carboline (198) was accomplished under the usual conditions of demethylation and subsequent alkylation and ester hydrolysis steps.
Reverse indoles, i.e., compounds where B is carbon and D is nitrogen can be prepared as described in Scheme VIg, below.
S cheme VI g
Figure imgf000157_0001
Aryl hydrazines (200) are condensed with substituted prpionaldehydes to form hydrazones which are cyclized to indoles (201) by treatment with phosphorous trichloride at room temperature (Ref 1) . The indoles are N-alkylated on reaction with a base such as sodium hydride and an alph-bromo ester to give indoles (202) which are cyclized to tetrahydrocarbazoles (203) by Lewis acids (e.g., aluminum chloride) or by radical initiators (e.g., tributyltin hydride) . Compounds (203) can be converted to carbazoles by, for example, refluxing in a solvent such as carbitol in the presence of Pd/C.
Compounds of formula I wherein A is pyridyl can be prepared as described in Schemes VIIg(a)-(b), below.
Scheme Vllg (a
Figure imgf000159_0001
(218)
X is halo and R is (CH2)mR5. Commercially available 4-chloroindole (210) is treated with 3 equivalents of t_-butyllithium followed by carbon dioxide, 1 equivalent of n-butyllithium, l-dimethylamino-2-nitroethene, and acid to provide carboxylic acid (211), which may be esterified to give (212) . Alkylation at the 1-position followed by hydrogenation provides aminoethyl indole (214) . Cyclization with phosgene to (215) followed by aromatization gives carboline (216) . Treatment of (216) with the appropriate Weinreb reagent provides amide (217), which may be alkylated with, for example, ethyl bromoacetate and saponified with sodium hydroxide to give the carboline (218) .
Scheme VΙIg(b)
)3P or
Figure imgf000161_0001
(220)
Figure imgf000161_0002
(226) (227)
R3(a) is as defined in Scheme 1(a) , X is halo, and R is (CH )mR5.
The 1,3-dione structures (228) are either commercially available or readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials. Preparation of the aniline derivatives (220) (X=C1, Br, or I) are accomplished by reducing an appropriately substituted benzoic acid derivative to the corresponding aniline by treatment with a reducing agent such as SnCl2 in hydrochloric acid in an inert solvent such as ethanol or by hydrogenation using hydrogen gas and sulfided platinum or carbon or palladium on carbon. The amino group of (228) is protected with an appropriate protecting group, such as the, carboethoxyl, benzyl, CBZ
(benzyloxycarbonyl) or BOC (tert-butoxycarbonyl) protecting group, and the like.
The dione (228) and aniline derivative (220) are condensed according to the general procedure of Chen, et al . , (Ref 10) or Yang, et al . , (Ref 11), with or without a noninterfering solvent, such as methanol, toluene, or methylene chloride, with or without an acid, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid or trifluoroacetic acid, with or without N-chlorosuccinimide and dimethyl sulfide, to afford the coupled product (221) .
Compound (221) is cyclized under basic conditions with a copper (I) salt in an inert solvent according to the general procedure of Yang, et al . , (Reftδ) . The derivative (221) is treated with a base, such as sodium hydride, in an inert solvent, such as HMPA, at a temperature between 0 and 25 °C . A copper (I) salt, such as copper (I) iodide, is added and the resultant mixture stirred at a temperature between 25 and 150 °C for 1 to 48 hours to afford compound (222) . Compound (221) may also be cyclized according to the general procedure of Chen, et al . , (Ref 10) . The derivative (221) is treated with a base, such as sodium bicarbonate, and a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(PPh3)4, in an inert solvent, such as HMPA, at a temperature between 25 and 150 °C to afford compound (222) .
In a preferred method, intermediate (171) is treated with a transition metal catalyst, such as Pd (OAc) 2 (O-tol) 3P in the presence of a base such as triethylamine using a cosolvent of DMF/acetonitrile to prepare (222 ) .
Compound (222) is N-alkylated with an appropriately substituted benzyl halide in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, in a noninterfering solvent, such as dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide to afford ketone (223) . In a two step, one pot process (222) is aromatized by treatment with acetic acid and palladium on carbon in a noninterfering solvent, such as carbitol or cymene, followed by treatment with hydrogen gas and palladium on carbon to cleave the nitrogen protecting group and produce the phenolic derivative (224) .
The ester (224) is converted to the corresponding amide (225) under standard conditions with ammonia (preferably) or an ammonium salt, such as ammonium acetate, in an inert solvent, such as water or alcohol, preferably methanol, or with MeClAlNH2 in an inert solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature between 0 to 110 °C . Alkylation of the phenolic oxygen of compound 38 with an appropriate haloester, such as methyl bromoacetate, in the presence of a base, such as cesium carbonate, potassium or sodium carbonate, in an inert solvent, such as dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide affords the ester-amide (226) . Other haloesters, such as ethyl bromoacetate, propyl bromoacetate, butyl bromoacetate, and the like can also be used to prepare the corresponding esters. Saponification of compound (226), with lithium hydroxide in an inert solvent, such as methanol-water , affords (227). The intermediate and final products may isolated and purified by conventional techniques such as chromatography or recrystallization . Regioisomeric products and intermediates can be separated by standard methods, such as, recrystallization or chromatography. References :
10) L.-C. Chen et al . , Synthesis 385 (1995) 11) S.-C. Yang et al . , Heterocycles, 32, 2399 (1991) h) Pyrazole SPLA2 inhibitors
The method of the invention may be practiced using pyrazole SPLA2 inhibitors, which are described (together with the method of making) in US Patent Application
No. 08/984261, filed December 3, 1997, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Suitable pyrazole compounds are represented by formula (Ih)
Figure imgf000164_0001
wherein :
R-L is phenyl, isoquinolin-3-yl, pyrazinyl, pyridin-2- yl, pyridin-2-yl substituted at the 4-position with - (C1-C4) alkyl, (Cχ-C ) alkoxyl, -CN or -(CH2)ncONH2 where n is 0-2;
R2 is phenyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4) alkyl, -CN, halo, -N02 , C02 (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and -CF3; naphthyl; thiophene or thiophene substituted with 1 to 3 halo groups; R3 is hydrogen; phenyl; phenyl (C2-C5) alkenyl; pyridyl; naphthyl; quinolinyl; (C1-C ) alkylthiazolyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4) alkyl, -CN, -CONH2, -N02, -CF3, halo,
(C1-C4) alkoxy, CO2 (C1-C4 ) alkyl, phenoxy and SR4 where R4 is - (C1-C4) alkyl or halophenyl; phenyl substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of -0(CH2)pR5 where p is 1 to 3 and R5 is -CN,
-CO2H, -CONH2, or tetrazolyl, phenyl and
-OR" where R" is cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl, or phenyl substituted with halo or (C1-C4) alkoxy; or phenyl substituted with two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached form a methylenedioxy ring; and m is 1 to 5; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Particularly preferred are pyrazole type SPLA2 inhibitors as follows :
A pyrazole compound of formula (I), supra, wherein: R! is pyridine-2-yl or pyridine-2-yl substituted at the 4-position with - (C.-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, -CN or -(CH2)ncONH2 where n is 0-2;
R2 is phenyl substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, -CN, halo, -NO2, C02 (Cχ-C4) alkyl and -CF3; and
R3 is phenyl; phenyl (C2~Cg) alkenyl; phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, -CN, -CONH2, -NO2 , -CF3, halo, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, CO2 (C1-C4 ) alkyl, phenoxy and SR4 where R4 is - (C]_-C4 ) alkyl or halo phenyl; phenyl substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of -0(CH2)pR^ where p is 1 to 3 and R5 is -CN, -CO2H, -CONH2 or tetrazolyl, phenyl and -OR6 where R6 is cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl or phenyl substituted with halo or (C -C4 ) alkoxy; or phenyl substituted with two substituents which when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached form a methylenedioxy ring.
Specific suitable pyrazole type SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows: Compounds selected from the group consisting of 3-(2-chloro- 6-methylphenylsulfonylamino) -4- (2- (4-acetamido) pyridyl) -5- (3- (4-fluorophenoxy) benzylthio) -( IH) -pyrazole and 3- (2, 6- dichlorophenylsulfonylamino) -4- (2- (4-acetamido) pyridyl) -5- (3- (4-fluorophenoxy) benzylthio) - (IH) -pyrazole .
The pyrazole compounds of formula Ih are prepared as described in Scheme Ih below.
S cheme Ih
Figure imgf000167_0001
L is a leaving group.
In an aprotic polar solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, an acetonitrile compound (1) is deprotonated by treatment with an excess of a strong base, such as sodium hydride, preferably under an inert gas, such as nitrogen. The deprotonated intermediate is treated with carbon disulfide and then alkylated twice with an appropriately substituted alkyl halide (2) of the formula R3(CH2) , where L is a leaving group, preferably bromine, and R3 and m are as defined above, to prepare intermediate compound (3) . The reaction is conducted at ambient temperatures and is substantially complete in 1 to 24 hours. Cyclization to form the amino substituted pyrazole (4) is achieved by reacting intermediate (3) with hydrazine at room temperature for from about 1 to 24 hours.
Selective sulfonylation of the amino group of intermediate (4) can be accomplished by treatment with a sulfonyl chloride (5) of the formula R2sθ2Cl, where R^ is as defined above, to prepare product (6) . The reaction is preferably conducted in a solvent, such as pyridine, at ambient temperature for a period of time of from 1 to 24 hours. Preparation of 2 , 6-dimethylphenylsulfonyl chloride can be accomplished as described in J. Org . Chem. 25, 1996 (1960) . All other sulfonyl chlorides are commercially available .
i) Phenyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors (and the method of making them) are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/979446, filed November 24, 1997 (titled, Phenyl Glyoxamides as SPLA2 Inhibitors), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a phenyl glyoxamide type sPLA.2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows:
A compound of the formula (Ii:
Figure imgf000168_0001
wherein :
X is -0- or -(CH2)m-, where m is 0 or 1; Y is -CO2-, -PO3-, -SO3-; R is independently -H or - (C1-C4 ) alkyl; R! and R2 are each independently -H, halo or - (C1-C4) alkyl;
R3 and R4 are each independently -H, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C -C4 ) alkoxy, (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, halo, phenyl or phenyl substituted with halo; n is 1-8; and p is 1 when Y is -CO2- or -SO3- and 1 or 2 when Y is -PO3-; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
A specific suitable phenyl glyoxamide type sPL .2 inhibitors is 2- ( 4-carboxybut-l-yl-oxy) -4- (3-phenylphenoxy) - phenylglyoxamide .
These phenyl glyoxylamide compounds useful in the method of the invention are prepared as follows:
Compounds where R1, R , R3 and R4 are H, and X, Y and n and p are as defined above can be prepared according to the following Scheme Ii.
Scheme Ii
Figure imgf000170_0001
R' is -(C1-C4)alkyl
Reflux of (1) with oxalyl chloride in an alkyl halide solvent, such as chloroform, using 4-N,N' dimethylamino pyridine as a catalyst achieves intermediate (2) .
Under Friedel-Crafts conditions, using a suitable Lewis-acid catalyst such as aluminum chloride, compound (2) is internally cyclized to form compound (3) . The reaction is preferably conducted at temperatures from about 0 °C to room temperature and allowed to proceed for about 24 hours. Aminolysis of (3) to amide (4) can be achieved by treatment with concentrated ammonium hydroxide. Alkylation of the hydroxyl of compound (4) can be readily achieved by treatment with an appropriate alkylating agent, such as Br(CH2)nY, where Y is -CO2R, -PO3R2 or SO3R and R is - (C -C4 ) alkyl, to form intermediate (5) . The reaction is preferably conducted in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl formamide, in the presence of potassium carbonate and a suitable catalyst, such as potassium iodide.
Conversion of (5) to the carboxylic or sulfonic acid or acid salt (6) may be achieved by treatment with an appropriate base, such as aqueous sodium hydroxide, in a polar protic solvent, such as methanol.
When n is 2, a bromoacetal must be employed as an alkylating agent to achieve the carboxylic acid (6) . The alkylated moiety (5) is then converted to the acid (6) by oxidizing with sodium dichromatate in aqueous conditions. When Y is -Pθ3_, conversion to the acid (6), is preferably conducted in an alkyl halide solvent, such as methylene chloride, using a dealkylating agent, such as trimethylsilyl bromide, and an excess of potassium carbonate, followed by treatment with methanol.
When RΛ R2, R3 or R4 are other than hydrogen, the preparation proceeds as described in Scheme Hi on the following page. Scheme H i
Figure imgf000172_0001
(12) (13)
R' is as defined in Scheme Ii. An appropriately R^, R2 substituted phenol (7) is converted to lactone (8) following the procedures described in Scheme Ii, steps (a-b) above.
Conversion to the intermediate (9) is accomplished by reacting (2a) with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid which affords removal of aluminum chloride from the reaction. Acid (9) is converted to the corresponding acid chloride using oxalyl chloride with dimethyl formamide as a catalyst. The acid chloride is recyclized to the lactone (10) on removal of the solvent, preferably under vacuum. The lactone (10) is converted to the glyoxamide (11) by treatment with an excess of ammonia as described in Schemetl, step (c) , above.
Alkylation of (11) to prepare the ester (12), followed by conversion to the acid is accomplished according to the procedure outlined in Scheme I, steps (d) and (e) . Alternately, conversion of (10) to (12) can be accomplished in a one-pot procedure by treating the lactone (10) with sodium amide in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethylformamide, preferably at temperatures of from about 0 °C to 20 °C, followed by alkylation with an appropriate alkyl halide.
j ) Pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making them are disclosed in U.S. Patent Applicaton Serial No. 08/985518 filed December 5, 1997 (titled, "Pyrroles as SPLA2 Inhibitors") , the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention as follows: A compound of the formula (Ij
Figure imgf000174_0001
Ri is hydrogen, (C1-C4 ) alkyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of - (C -C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C -C4 ) alkylthio, halo and phenyl;
R2 is hydrogen, - (C2.-C4 ) alkyl, halo, (C -C4 ) alkoxy or (C1-C4) alkylthio;
R3 and R4 are each hydrogen or when taken together are =0;
R5 is -NH2 or -NHNH2;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen or when one of R6 and R7 is hydrogen, the other is - (C1-C4) alkyl, -(CH2)nR10 where R10 is -CO2R11, -Pθ3(R1:L)2, -Pθ4(R1:L)2 or -SO3R11 where R11 is independently hydrogen or - (C1-C4 ) alkyl and n is 0 to 4; or R6 and R7 , taken together, are =0 or =S;
X is R8 (Ci-Cg) alkyl; R8 (C -Cg) alkenyl or phenyl substituted at the ortho position with R8 where R8 is
(CH2)nR10 where R10 is -C02R1:L, -P03(R1:L)2, -P0 (R1:L) or -SO3RH, RU and n is 1 to 4 as defined above, and additionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, halo, (C1.-C4 ) alkoxy, or two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached, form a naphthyl group; and R^ is hydrogen or methyl or ethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Preferred pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are compounds of formula Ij wherein; Rl is phenyl;
R2 is methyl or ethyl; R5 is -NH ;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen;
X is R8 (Cχ-Cg) alkyl or phenyl substituted at the ortho position with R8 where
R8 is -CO2R11; and R^ is methyl or ethyl.
A specific suitable pyrrole SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention is 2- [l-benzyl-2 , 5-dimethyl-4- (2- carboxyphenylmethyl) pyrrol-3-yl] glyoxamide .
The pyrrole compounds are prepared as follows:
Compounds of formula I where R^ is -NH2 can be prepared as shown in Scheme Ij, below.
Scheme I j
Figure imgf000176_0001
( c )
Figure imgf000176_0002
( 6 ) ( 5 ) ( 4 )
An appropriately substituted gamma-diketone (1) is reacted with an alkylamine of the formula NHCH2R-'- to give pyrrole (2) . Under Friedel-Crafts conditions, using a suitable Lewis-acid catalyst such as stannic chloride, aluminum chloride, or titanium tetrachloride (preferably stannic chloride) pyrrole (2) is ring alkylated with an alkyl or arylalkyl halide compound of the formula ZCR6R7X where Z is a suitable halogen and R8 of X is a protected acid or ester. The reaction is preferably conducted in a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent, such as dichloromethane, at ambient temperatures and allowed to proceed for from about 1 to about 24 hours. Intermediate (3) is converted to (4) by sequential treatment with oxalyl chloride followed by ammonia. Selective reduction of (4) is accomplished in a two step process. In a hydride reduction using, for example, sodium borohydride, the hydroxy intermediate (5) is prepared which can be further reduced using either catalytic or hydride reduction (preferably palladium on carbon) to prepare (6) . Deprotection of R8 to the acid may be readily achieved by conventional techniques. For example, when an alkyl ester is used as a protecting group, deprotection can be accomplished by treatment with a base, such as sodium hydroxide .
k) Naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making them are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/091079, filed December 9, 1966 (titled, "Naphthyl Glyoxamides as sPLA2 Inhibitors"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount a naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows :
A naphthyl glyoxamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula Ik
Figure imgf000177_0001
wherein: R! and R2 are each independently hydrogen or a non- interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of R! or R2 must be hydrogen; X is -CH2- or -0-; and Y is (CH2)nZ where n is a number from 1-3 and Z is an acid group selected from the group consisting of CO2H, -SO3H or -PO(OH) -
A specific suitable naphthyl glyoxamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention has the following structural formula:
Figure imgf000178_0001
The naphthyl glyoxamide compounds are prepared as follows:
Compounds of formula I where X is oxygen can be prepared by the following reaction Scheme Ik.
Scheme Ik
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000179_0002
Figure imgf000180_0001
In the above depicted reaction scheme, the 1 , 5-dihydroxy napthalene starting material (1) is dispersed in water and then treated with 2 equivalents of potassium hydroxide. The resultant solution is chilled in an ice bath and one equivalent of a strong mineral acid, such as hydrochloric acid, is added to produce the potassium saltt (2) . Alkylation of the radical (2) can then be accomplished by treatment with a methylating agent such as dimethyl sulfate to prepare the ether (3) .
Preparation of (4) is achieved by reacting the ether (3) with an appropriately substituted phenol in an Ullman-type reaction using potassium carbonate and cupric oxide .
De-methylation of (4) can be accomplished by treating (4) with a 40% HBr/HOAC solution at reflux in a protic polar solvent such as acetic acid, to prepare (5) . Reflux of compound (5) with oxalyl chloride and
4-demethylamino pyridine, in an alkylhalide solvent such as methylene chloride, prepares the oxalyl chloride (6) .
Internal cyclization of (6) can be achieved under Friedel-Crafts condition using aluminum chloride or other similar metal halide as the catalyst. The reaction can be conveniently conducted in an alkyl halide solvent, such as 1, 2-dichloro ethane.
Alkylation and hydrolysis of the cyclized compound (7) can be achieved by reacting (7) with an alkaliamide base, such as sodium amide, followed by treatment with an alkylating agent, such as methyl bromoacetate, using potassium iodide as a catalyst.
Finally, the acid (9) is achieved by treating the ester (8) with an alkali base, such as aqueous sodium hydroxide, followed by treatment with a dilute aqueous mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid The acid compound (9) is then extracted with an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate .
The final product (9) can be purified using standard recrystallization procedures in a suitable organic solvent such as methylene chloride/hexane .
Compounds of formula I where X is methylene can be prepared as shown in the following Scheme Ilk
Scheme Ilk
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000182_0001
(2a)
Using an appropriately substituted phenyl bromide, a Grignard reagent is prepared. The phenyl Grignard is then reacted with 4-methoxy naphthylnitrile and the resultant compound is hydrolyzed with a dilute acid such as hydrochloric acid to form the benzoyl naphthylene compound (la) .
Reduction of (la) to form compound (2a) is accomplished by treatment with a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride . The reaction is conducted in a solvent- catalyst such as trifluoroacetic acid and initiated in an ice bath which is allowed to warm to room temperature as the reaction proceeds . The desired naphthyl glyoxamide may then be prepared from (2a) according to the procedure in Scheme I starting with the chloromethylation step.
It will be readily appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the substituted benzyl bromide, substituted phenol and substituted naphthylnitrile compounds of Schemes I and II are either commercially available or can be readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials. 1) Phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors and methods of making them are disclosed in US Patent Application 08/976858, filed November 24 1997 (titled, "Phenyl Acetamides as SPLA2 Inhibitors"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitor represented by formula (II) as follows :
Figure imgf000183_0001
wherein :
R1 is -H or -0(CH2)nZ;
R2 is -H or -OH;
R3 and R4 are each independently -H, halo or - (Cχ-C ) alkyl;
One of R5 and R6 is -YR7 and the other is -H, where Y is -0- or -CH2- and R7 is phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, - (C.-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two halo groups;
Z is -CO2R, -PO3R2 or -SO3R where R is -H or - (C1-C4) alkyl; and n i s 1 - 8 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, racemate or optical isomer thereof; provided that when R6 is YR7 , Ri is hydrogen; and when R1, R2 , R3, R4 and R6 are hydrogen and R5 is YR7 where Y is -0-, R7 cannot be phenyl; and when R1, R2 , R3, R4 and R6 are hydrogen, R5 is YR7 where Y is CH2, R7 cannot be phenyl substituted with one methoxy or two chloro groups .
Preferred suitable phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention are as follows:
Compounds of formula I wherein R , R3 and R4 is H, Y is oxygen or CH2, R7 is phenyl or phenyl substituted at the meta position with one or two substituents selected from halo, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with halo and n is 4-5.
A specific suitable phenyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors useful in the method of the invention is 2- ( 4-carboxybutoxy) -4- (3- phenylphenoxy) phenylacetamide .
The phenyl acetimde compounds are prepared as follows:
Compounds of formula I where R^ and R2 are H, R^ or R6 are YR7 where R7 is phenyl or substituted phenyl and Y is oxygen can be prepared as illustrated in Scheme 11(a), below. Scheme 11(a)
Figure imgf000185_0001
X is halo;
R8 and R^ are each independently -H, halo, - (C1-C4 ) alkyl, (C1-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two halo groups; and PG is a carboxyl protecting group An appropriately substituted carboxy-protected halophenyl compound (1), where the halogen is preferably bromine, is coupled with an appropriately substituted phenol (2) under modified Ullmann conditions, by refluxing with potassium carbonate and cupric oxide in an aprotic polar solvent, such as pyridine, under an inert gas such as argon. The reaction is substantially complete in 1-24 hours. Intermediate (3) is deprotected by treatment with a base such as aqueous potassium hydroxide using a solvent, such as diethylene glycol . The reaction, preferably conducted at about 100°-150 °C, is substantially complete in 1-24 hours.
Conversion to the amide (5) can then be readily achieved by treatment first with oxalyl chloride in an alkyl halide solvent, such as methylene chloride, using dimethylformamide as a catalyst, at temperatures of from about 0 °C to ambient temperature, followed by treatment with an excess of ammonia gas, again in an alkyl halide solvent .
Alternately, compounds of formula I can be prepared according to the procedure of Scheme 1(b), below. The substituted phenol (2) is coupled with an appropriately substituted benzyl halide (6) as described in Scheme I (a) , step a, above, to prepare (7) .
Halogenation of (7) is achieved using a halogenating agent, such as N-bromosuccinimide and a catalyst, such as 2 , 2 ' azobisisobutyronitrile, in an alkyl halide solvent, such as chloroform, to prepare (8) .
Treatment of (8) with sodium cyanide in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl formamide produces the nitrile (9) which can then be readily converted to the amide (10) by treatment with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid.
Scheme 11 ( b )
Figure imgf000187_0001
R8 and R^ are as shown in Scheme I (a) , X is halo.
In another procedure, compounds of formula I where R1, R2, R3 and R4 are hydrogen, Y is -0- or -CH2~ and R7 is phenyl can be prepared as portrayed in Scheme III.
S cheme I I I
Figure imgf000188_0001
Figure imgf000188_0002
An appropriate diphenyl compound (11) is treated with paraformaldehyde and a halogenating agent, such as 40% hydrogen bromide in acetic acid. Two positional isomers result with the X substituent at either the meta or para position of the phenyl ring to which it is attached.
Displacement of the halogen to prepare the nitrile isomers (13) can be achieved by treatment of (12) with sodium cyanide in dimethylformamide as described in Schemetl (b) , step (c) , above. The isomers can then be readily separated by conventional chromatographic techniques and each isomer may be converted to its respective amide (14) by treatment with hydrogen peroxide and potassium carbonate in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethylsulfoxide .
Compounds where R^ is -0(CH2)n z can be prepared as illustrated in Scheme IIIl, below.
Scheme I I Il
Figure imgf000189_0001
Figure imgf000190_0001
R is - (C1-C4) alkyl and p = 1 or 2.
Intermediate (16) is prepared by refluxing an appropriately substituted diphenyl compound (15) with oxalyl chloride in an alkyl halide solvent, such as chloroform. Preferably the reaction is catalyzed with 4,4-N- dimethylaminopyridine .
Cyclization to the lactone (17) can be achieved under Friedel-Crafts conditions using a suitable metal halide, such as aluminum chloride, as the catalyst. Conversion to the glyoxamide (18) can be achieved by aminolysis of the lactone ring using concentrated ammonium hydroxide . Alkylation of the hydroxy group to prepare the desired alkyl-linked ester (19) occurs by treatment of (18) with an appropriate alkylating agent, such as (X) (CH2)nB where B is CO2PG, -PO3PG or -SO3PG, X is halo and PG is an acid protecting group, preferably methyl. Partial reduction of the carbonyl in the glyoxamide (19) is achieved by treatment with a suitable reducing agent, such as sodium borohydride in methanol, preferably at temperatures of from 0°-20 °C, to prepare the intermediate (20) . The desired acid or acid salt (21) can be accomplished by treatment with a suitable base, such as sodium hydroxide.
Further reduction of intermediate (20) can be achieved by treatment with triethylsilane in a strong acid, such as trifluroacetic acid, under an inert gas, such as argon, to prepare (22) followed, again, by conversion to the acid or salt (23) with a strong base.
m) Naphthyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitors and the method of making them are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/091077, filed December 9, 1996 (titled, "Benzyl naphthalene SPLA2 Inhibitors"), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The method of the invention is for treatment of a mammal, including a human, afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective a naphthyl acetamide SPLA2 inhibitor represented by formula (Im)as follows:
Figure imgf000192_0001
wherein :
Ri and R2 are each independently hydrogen or a non-interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of Ri and R2 must be hydrogen;
R3 is hydrogen, -0
Figure imgf000192_0002
P- where n is from 2 to 4 and Y is -CO2H, -PO3H2 or SO3H; and X is -0- or -CH2-.
Compounds where X is oxygen can be prepared by the following Scheme Im. Scheme Im
Figure imgf000193_0001
In the first step of the above reaction scheme, an appropriately substituted l-bromo-4-methylnapthalene and an appropriately substituted phenol are dissolved in an aprotic polar solvent such as pyridine. The mixture is treated with an excess of potassium carbonate and an excess of copper- bronze and refluxed under a nitrogen blanket to produce (1) .
Bromination of compound (1) to produce (2) is accomplished by refluxing (1) with a brominating agent, such as N-bromosuccinamide, in a non-polar alkyl halide solvent, such as carbon tetrachloride, using 2,2- azobisisobutyronitrile as a catalyst.
Treatment of (2) with sodium cyanide produces (3) . This reaction is best conducted in an aprotic polar solvent, such as dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), while heating to a temperature of about 60 °C.
Hydrolysis of the cyano compound (3) to produce the acid (4) is accomplished in two steps. Using a polar protic solvent, such as diethylene glycol as a cosolvent, the cyano compound (3) is treated with an alkali metal base, such as potassium hydroxide, and the mixture is heated to about 90-95 °C. The resultant product is then reacted with a strong mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid.
Conversion of (4) to the desired naphthyl acetamide compound (5) is accomplished by another two-step process. First, the acid (4) is dissolved in an alkyl halide solvent such as methylene chloride. The acid/alkyl halide solution is chilled in an ice bath then treated with oxalyl chloride, using dimethylformamide (DMF) as a catalyst, to produce the acid chloride. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature and then treated with ammonia gas at room temperature to produce (5) .
The desired product (5) can be purified using standard recrystallization procedures in a suitable organic solvent, preferably methylene chloride/hexane . Compounds where X is methylene can be prepared by the following Scheme Ilm
Scheme I lm
Br
Figure imgf000195_0001
(l) KCN (2) DMF
Figure imgf000196_0001
Compound (la) is prepared by a grignard reaction. The Grignard reagent starting material is prepared by reacting an appropriately substituted phenyl bromide with magnesium and ether. The reagent is then reacted with an appropriately substituted naphthyl nitrile and the resultant compound is hydrolyzed with an aqueous acid such as hydrochloric acid to form the benzoyl napthyl (la) . Reduction of (la) is accomplished by treatment with a molar excess of a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride . The reaction is initiated in an ice bath using a solvent-catalyst such as trifluoroacetic acid and then allowed to warm to room temperature as the reduction proceeds.
Chloromethylation of (2a) is achieved by treatment with an excess of formaldehyde and concentrated hydrochloric acid in a polar acidic solvent such as an acetic/phosphoric acid mixture. The reaction is best conducted at a temperature of about 90 °C.
The nitrile 4 (a) is prepared by a nucleophilic displacement of the chloride compound (3a) with cyanide. The reaction is conducted by refluxing (3a) with a slight molar excess in an aprotic polar solvent of sodium cyanide such as dimethylformamide (DMF) for about five hours, then allowing the reaction to continues while it cools to room temperature .
The desired naphthylamide (5a) is then prepared from the nitrile (4a) in a three-step process. To a solution of nitrile (4a), dissolved in an aprotic polar solvent such as DMSO, potassium carbonate is added to make the nitrile solution slightly basic. Hydrolysis of the nitrile is then achieved by treatment with an aqueous hydrogen peroxide solution. Crystallization of the naphthyl acetamide may be accomplished by adding water to the peroxide solution.
Compounds where R3 is other than hydrogen can be readily prepared by using a l-bromo-4-methyl-napthalene with a protected phenol, such as a methoxy group, on the 6-position of the napthalene ring as a starting material. The process is conducted, as described above, to prepare compounds (1) - (3) . Acid hydrolysis of the cyano group (3) and deprotection of the protected phenol can be accomplished by treating (3) with a 40% hydrogen bromide solution in acetic acid. The deprotected phenol can then be reacted to prepare the appropriate substituent at the 6-position of the napthyl ring. For example, preparation of compounds where R3 is -0(CH2)nCOOH can be achieved by alkyalting the phenol with an appropriate alkyl halide followed by conversion to the acid by treatment with a base such as aqueous sodium hydroxide followed by dilute hydrochloric acid.
It will be readily appreciated by one skilled in the art that the substituted phenol and phenyl bromide starting materials are either commercially available or can be readily prepared by known techniques from commercially available starting materials. All other reactants and reagents used to prepare the compounds of the present invention are commercially available. FORMULATIONS SUITABLE FOR USE IN THE METHOD OF THE INVENTION
The SPLA2 inhibitors used in the method of the invention may be administered to treat cystic fibrosis by any means that produces contact of the active agent with the agent's site of action in the human body. They can be administered by any conventional means available for use in conjunction with pharmaceuticals, either as individual therapeutic agents or in a combination of therapeutic agents. The SPLA2 inhibitors can be administered alone, but are generally administered with a pharmaceutical carrier selected on the basis of the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
Suitable formulations are those comprising a therapeutically effective amount of SPLA2 inhibitor together with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier, the composition being adapted for the particular route of administration chosen. By "pharmaceutically acceptable" it is meant the carrier, diluent or excipient must be compatible with the SPLA2 inhibitor ("active compound") in the formulation and not deleterious to the subject being treated.
For the pharmaceutical formulations any suitable carrier known in the art can be used. In such a formulation, the carrier may be a solid, liquid, or mixture of a solid and a liquid. A solid carrier can be one or more substances which may also act as flavoring agents, lubricants, solubilisers, suspending agents, binders, tablet disintegrating agents and encapsulating material. Tablets for oral administration may contain suitable excipients such as calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate, together with disintegrating agents, such as maize, starch, or alginic acid, and/or binding agents, for example, gelatin or acacia, and lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid, or talc. In tablets the SPLA2 inhibitor is mixed with a carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired. The powders and tablets preferably contain from about 1 to about 99 weight percent of the SPLA2 inhibitor.
Sterile liquid form formulations include suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs. The active compound can be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, such as sterile water, saline, dextrose solution, sterile organic solvent or a mixture of both.
The active compound can be administered orally in solid dosage forms, such as capsules, tablets, and powders, or in liquid dosage forms, such as elixirs, syrups, and suspensions. It can also be administered parenterally, in sterile liquid dosage forms. It can also be administered by inhalation in the form of a nasal spray or lung inhaler. It can also be administered topically as an ointment, cream, gel, paste, lotion, solution, spray, aerosol, liposome, or patch. Dosage forms used to administer the active compound usually contain suitable carriers, diluents, preservatives, or other excipients, as described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, a standard reference text in the field. Gelatin capsules may be prepared containing the active compound and powdered carriers, such as lactose, sucrose, mannitol, starch, cellulose derivatives, magnesium stearate, stearic acid, and the like. Similar diluents can be used to make compressed tablets and powders. Both tablets and capsules can be manufactured as sustained release products to provide for continuous release of medication over a period of hours. Compressed tablets can be sugar coated or film coated to mask any unpleasant taste and protect the tablet from the atmosphere, or enteric coated for selective disintegration in the gastrointestinal tract.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration can contain coloring and flavoring to increase patient acceptance. For parenteral and intravenous solutions, water, a suitable oil, saline, aqueous dextrose (glucose) , and related sugar solutions and glycols such as propylene glycol or polyethylene glycols are suitable carriers for parenteral solutions. Solutions for parenteral administration contain the active compound, suitable stabilizing agents, and if necessary, buffer substances. Anti-oxidizing agents such as sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, or ascorbic acid either alone or combined are suitable stabilizing agents. Also used are citric acid and its salts and sodium EDTA. In addition, parenteral solutions can contain preservatives, such as benzalkonium chloride, methyl- or propyl-paraben, and chlorobutanol .
Topical ointments, creams, gels, and pastes contain with the active compound diluents such as waxes, paraffins, starch, polyethylene glycol, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, animal and vegetable fats, talc and zinc oxide or mixtures of these or other diluents.
Topical solutions and emulsions can, for example, contain with the active compound, customary diluents (with the exclusion of solvents having a molecular weight below
200 except in the presence of a surface-active agent) , such as solvents, dissolving agents and emulsifiers; specific examples are water, ethanol, 2-propanol, ethyl carbonate, benzyl alcohol, propylene glycol, oils, glycerol, and fatty acid esters of sorbitol or mixtures thereof. Compositions for topical dosing may also contain preservatives or anti- oxidizing agents.
Powders and sprays can contain along with the active compound, the usual diluents, such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, and polyamide powders or mixtures of these materials. Aerosol sprays can contain the usual propellants. Liposomes can be made from such materials as animal or vegetable fats which will form lipid bilayers in which the active compound can be incorporated.
For inhalation administration, the SPLA2 inhibitor or formulations containing the inhibitor can be dissolved or dispersed in liquid form, such as in water or saline, preferably at a concentration at which the composition is fully solubilized and at which a suitable dose can be administered within an inhalable volume. A nebulizer (e.g., De Vilbiss 646) and compressed air generator (Pulmoaide, DeVilbiss) can be used to nebulize and deliver the compound or formulation containing the compound to the airway surfaces once or several times a day, as required. For infants, the dose may be adjusted proportionately for size or body weight.
Formulations containing compounds of the invention may be administered through the skin by an appliance such as a transdermal patch. Patches can be made of a matrix such as polyacrylamide and a semipermeable membrane made from a suitable polymer to control the rate at which the material is delivered to the skin. Other suitable transdermal patch formulations and configurations are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,296,222 and 5,271,940, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Lipophilic prodrug derivatives of the SPLA2 inhibitors are particularly well suited for transdermal absorption administration and delivery systems.
Formulations within the scope of this invention include the admixture of SPLA2 inhibitor with a therapeutically effective amount of any therapeutically effective co-agents for cystic fibrosis such as N-acetyl-cysteine, human recombinant DNAse, antibiotics, etc., as set out in the section "CO-AGENT - COMBINED THERAPY", infra.
Formulations used for facilitating lung mucus clearance in a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis may further comprise the step of concurrently administering a sodium channel blocker such as amiloride to the subject in an amount effective to inhibit the reabsorption of water from lung mucus membranes.
For all of the above formulations the preferred active compound are the lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compounds as previously described and methods of making as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,654,326 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) . Most preferred compounds within the general class of lH-indole-3-glyoxylamides are ( (3- (2-amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -1H- indol-4yl) oxy) acetic acid, sodium salt; and lH-indole-3- glyoxylamides are ( (3- (2-amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4yl) oxy) acetic acid, methyl ester.
PROPORTION AND WEIGHT OF ACTIVE COMPOUNDS USED IN THE METHOD OF THE INVENTION
The lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compound may be used at a concentration of 0.1 to 99.9 weight percent of the formulation.
Preferably the pharmaceutical formulation is in unit dosage form. The unit dosage form can be a capsule or tablet itself, or the appropriate number of any of these. The quantity of active compound in a unit dose of composition may be varied or adjusted from about 0.1 to about 1000 milligrams or more according to the particular treatment involved.
Compositions (dosage forms) suitable for internal administration contain from about 1 milligram to about 500 milligrams of active compound per unit. In these pharmaceutical compositions the active compound will ordinarily be present in an amount of about 0.5-95% by weight based on the total weight of the composition. Examples of useful pharmaceutical compositions and their proportions of ingredients are illustrated as follows:
Capsules: Capsules may be prepared by filling standard two- piece hard gelatin capsules each with 50 mg of powdered active compound, 175 mg of lactose, 24 mg of talc, and 6 mg of magnesium stearate.
Soft Gelatin Capsules: A mixture of active compound in soybean oil is prepared and injected by means of a positive displacement pump into gelatin to form soft gelatin capsules containing 50 mg of the active compound. The capsules are washed in petroleum ether and dried.
Tablets: Tablets may be prepared by conventional procedures so that the dosage unit is 50 mg of active compound, 6 mg of magnesium stearate, 70 mg of microcrystalline cellulose, 11 mg of cornstarch, and 225 mg of lactose. Appropriate coatings may be applied to increase palatability or delay absorption .
Suspensions: An aqueous suspension is prepared for oral administration so that each 5 ml contain 25 mg of finely divided active compound, 200 mg of sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, 5 mg of sodium benzoate, 1.0 g of sorbitol solution, U.S.P., and 0.025 mg of vanillin.
Injectables: A parenteral composition suitable for administration by injection is prepared by stirring 1.5% by weight of active compound in 10% by volume propylene glycol and water. The solution is sterilized by commonly used techniques .
Nasal Spray: An aqueous solution is prepared such that each 1 ml contains 10 mg of active compound, 1.8 mg methylparaben, 0.2 mg propylparaben and 10 mg methylcellulose . The solution is dispensed into 1 ml vials. The active compound may be used at a concentration of 0.1 to 99.9 weight percent of the formulation. Aerosol formulations are capable of dispersing into particle sizes of from about 0.5 to about 10 microns and have sufficient sPLA2 inhibitor to achieve concentrations of the inhibitor on the airway surfaces of from about 10~10 to 10-2 moles per liter.
THE PRACTICE OF THE METHOD OF THE INVENTION
The use of SPL 2 inhibitors in the method of the invention prevents progressive deterioration of lung tissue and lung function by inhibiting or reducing the degree of inflammation which may be a primary pathologic process in cystic fibrosis. The method of the invention is preferably used early in the life of the patient afflicted with cystic fibrosis, most preferably in a child just after diagnosis of cystic fibrosis. The method of the invention can be practiced using pharmaceutical formulations containing SPLA2 inhibitors (preferably, SPLA2 inhibitors taught to be preferred in this specification) or formulations containing such SPLA2 inhibitors as taught in the preceding section. The underlying cause of cystic fibrosis will not be prevented by the method of this invention, but symptoms will be reduced in severity or extent ameliorated by administration of SPLA2 inhibitors (and their formulations) . The dosage administered will, of course, vary depending upon known factors such as the pharmacodynamic characteristics of the particular agent, and its mode and route of administration; age, health, and weight of the recipient; nature and extent of symptoms, kind of concurrent treatment, frequency of treatment, and the effect desired. Usually a daily dosage of active compound can be about 0.1 to 200 milligrams per kilogram of body weight. Ordinarily 0.5 to 50, and preferably 1 to 25 milligrams per kilogram per day given in divided doses 1 to 6 times a day or in sustained release form is effective to obtain desired results .
In general, the SPLA2 inhibitor will be administered to a human so that a therapeutically effective amount is received. A therapeutically effective amount may coventionally be determined for an individual patient by administering the active compound in increasing doses and observing the effect on the patient, for example, reduction in the amount of daily sputum production, improvement in lung function as assessed by standard pulmonary function listing, improvement in exercise, reduction in frequency of bacterial infections, or a reduction in other symptoms associated with cystic fibrosis.
The exact amount of sPLA2 inhibitor required for preventing or treating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis (or other indications listed in the "Summary of the Invention", supra.) will vary from person to person, depending on the age and general condition of the subject and the severity of the disease, mode of administration, etc. An appropriate amount may be determined by one of ordinary skill by judging the effective elimination, reduction, or prevention of symptoms associated with cystic fibrosis (e.g., lung mucus clearance) . Generally, the compound must be administered in a manner and a dose to achieve in the human a blood level concentration of SPLA2 inhibitor of from 10 to 3000 nanograms/ml, and preferably a concentration of 100 to 800 nanograms/ml.
The treatment regimen for many cystic firbosis may stretch over many days to months or to years . Oral dosing is preferred for patient convenience and tolerance. With oral dosing, one to four oral doses per day, each from about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg of body weight with preferred doses being from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg.
Parenteral administration (particularly, intravenous administration) is often preferred in instances where rapid alleviation of patient distress is required. With parenteral administration doses of 0.01 to 100 mg/kg/day administered continuously or intermittently throughout the day may be used. For parenteral administation, the comound may be administered in a physiologic saline vehicle (e.g., 0.9% normal saline, 0.45% normal saline, etc.) a dextrose vehicle (e.g., 5% dextrose in water), or a combination of saline and dextrose vehicle (0.9% normal saline in 5% dextrose) .
Inhalation therapy also may be useful either alone or as an adjunct to other routes of administration. With inhalation therapy, doses necessary to produce a decrease in the clinical symptoms of cystic fibrosis are readily determined and used.
CO-AGENT - COMBINED THERAPY The SPLA2 inhibitor (viz., active compound in a formulation of the invention) can also be administered in the method of the invention in combination with another pharmacologically active agent known to have utility for alleviating the symptoms of cystic fibrosis. For example, the sPLA2 inhibitors taught herein may be combined with the following therapeutic agents :
1. Agents for increasing mucus clearance a. N-acetyl-cysteine
2. Agents that DNA in cystic fibrosis sputum a. human recombinant DNAse
3. Drugs for restoring water and salt content a. amiloride b. triphosphate nucleotides
4. Agents that control lung infection a. antibiotics
(i) penicillins
(ii) cephalosporins, ceftazadime (iii) aminoglycosides
5. Inhaled drugs a. beta-adrenergic agonists b. anticholinergics
6. Oral Steroids 7. Pancreatic enzymes 8. Gene Therapy
TESTING METHODS FOR CYSTIC FIBROSIS
The diagnostic criteria for cystic fibrosis are those found in standard medical references (e.g., Harrison's
Principles of Internal Medicine, thirteenth ed., 1994, by McGraw-Hill, Inc., ISBN 0-07-032370-4, pgs . , 1194-1197). These criteria may be used to determine when to begin using the method of the invention, the frequency and degree of treatment, and the time for cessation of treatment.
The cystic fibrosis patient having lung disease may be evaluated with any conventional measure of lung capacity, nature of extent of sputum, and etc. The cystic fibrosis patient having gastointestinal disease may be evaluated by conventional criteria for adaquate nutrition.
While the present invention has been illustrated above by certain specific embodiments, these are not intended to limit the scope of the invention as described in the appended claims .

Claims

I claim:
1. A method for treatment of a mammal afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a SPLA2 inhibitor type selected from; IH-indole-3-glyoxylamide,
IH-indole-3-hydrazide, IH-indole-3-acetamide, IH-indole-1-glyoxylamide, lH-indole-1-hydrazide, IH-indole-1-acetamides, indolizine-1-acetamides, indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazide, indolizine-1-glyoxylamide, indene-1-acetamide, indene-1-acetic acid hydrazide, indene-1-glyoxylamide, carbazoles, tetrahydrocarbazole, pyrazole, phenyl glyoxamide, pyrrole, naphthyl glyoxamide, or phenyl acetamide.
2. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide of the invention represented by the formula (la), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or aliphatic ester prodrug derivative thereof;
Figure imgf000209_0001
wherein ; both X are oxygen;
R]_ is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000210_0001
and
Figure imgf000210_0002
where \ ^S a radical independently selected from halo, Cι-C]_ø- alkyl, C_-Cιo alkoxy, -S- (C^-Cm alkyl), and C]_-CIQ haloalkyl and t is a number from 0 to 5;
R2 is selected from the group; halo, cyclopropyl, methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
R and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) . wherein -(La)- is an acid linker; provided, the acid linker group, -(La)-, for R4 is selected from the group consisting of;
Figure imgf000211_0001
and provided, the acid linker, [ a)~, for R5 is selected from group consisting of;
Figure imgf000212_0001
Figure imgf000212_0002
Figure imgf000213_0001
Figure imgf000213_0002
Figure imgf000213_0003
wherein Rg4 and Rg5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, C^-Cm alkyl, aryl, C]_-C]_o alkaryl, C^-Cm aralkyl, carboxy, carbalkoxy, and halo; and provided, that at least one of R4 and R5 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) and wherein the (acidic group) on the group - (La) - (acidic group) of R4 or R5 is selected from -C02H, -SO3H, or -P(0) (0H)2;
Rg and R7 are each independently selected form hydrogen and non-interfering substituents, with the non-interfering substituents being selected from the group consisting of the following: C -Cg alkyl, C2~Cg alkenyl, C2-Cg alkynyl, C7-C12 aralkyl, C7-C 2 alkaryl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkenyl, phenyl, tolulyl, xylenyl, biphenyl, C -Cg alkoxy, C2~Cg alkenyloxy, C2~C alkynyloxy, C2~Cχ2 alkoxyalkyl, C2~C 2 alkoxyalkyloxy, C2~Cχ2 alkylcarbonyl, C2_C 2 alkylcarbonylamino, C2-C12 alkoxyamino, C2_C^2 alkoxyaminocarbonyl, C2~C 2 alkylamino, C^-Cg alkylthio, C2~C]_2 alkylthiocarbonyl, C -Cg alkylsulfinyl, C -Cg alkylsulfonyl, C2~Cg haloalkoxy, C -Cg haloalkylsulfonyl, C2-Cg haloalkyl, Cχ-Cg hydroxyalkyl, -C(0)0(Cχ-Cg alkyl), - (CH2 ) n-0- (C -Cg alkyl), benzyloxy, phenoxy, phenylthio, - (CONHSO2R) , -CHO, amino, amidino, bromo, carbamyl, carboxyl, carbalkoxy, - (CH2 ) n-C02H, chloro, cyano, cyanoguanidmyl, fluoro, guanidino, hydrazide, hydrazino, hydrazido, hydroxy, hydroxyamino, iodo, nitro, phosphono, -SO3H, thioacetal, thiocarbonyl, and C -Cg carbonyl; where n is from 1 to 8.
3. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or a prodrug derivative thereof selected from the group consisting of compounds (A) through (P) :
(A) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl)-2-methyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(B) dl-2- [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-methyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] propanoic acid,
(C) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'- biphenyl] -2-ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (D) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'- biphenyl] -3-ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(E) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1,1'- biphenyl] -4-ylmethyl) -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(F) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- [ (2, 6- dichlorophenyl) methyl] -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid (G) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl)-l-[4 (- fluorophenyl) methyl] -2-methyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(H) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -2-methyl-l- [ (1- naphthalenyl ) methyl] -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (I) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(J) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -l-[ (3- chlorophenyl) methyl] -2-ethyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(K) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'- biphenyl] -2-ylmethyl) -2-ethyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (L) [ [3- (2-amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'- biphenyl] -2-ylmethyl) -2-propyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(M) [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-cyclopropyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid, (N) [ [3- (2-Amino-l,2-dioxoethyl) -1- ( [1, l'- biphenyl] -2-ylmethyl) -2-cyclopropyl-lH-indol-4-yl] oxy] acetic acid,
(0) 4- [ [3- (2-Amino-l, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-5-yl] oxy] butanoic acid, and (P) mixtures of (A) through (0) .
4. The method of claim 1 wherein said SPLA2 inhibitor is administered orally.
5. The method of claim 1 wherein said SPLA2 inhibitor is administered parenerally.
6. A method for treatment of a human currently afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-3- glyoxylamide compound represented by the formulae:
Figure imgf000216_0001
Figure imgf000217_0001
and
Figure imgf000217_0002
7. A method for treatment of a mammal to alleviate or prevent the pathological effects of the following types of cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of [[3- (2- amino-1, 2-dioxoethyl) -2-ethyl-l- (phenylmethyl) -lH-indol-4- yl] oxy] acetic acid, methyl ester.
8. The method of claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 6 or 7 wherein the administration is intravenous.
9. The method of claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 6 or 7 wherein the administration is oral.
10. The method of claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 wherein administration is in an amount of from 0.01 mg/kg/day to 100 mg/kg/day.
11. The method of claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 wherein the therapeutically effective amount is in the form of a pharmaceutical formulation comprising the compound and a suitable carrier or excipient therefor.
12. Use of a an SPLA2 inhibitor selected from the a sPLA2 inhibitor type:
IH-indole-3-glyoxylamide, lH-indole-3-hydrazide, lH-indole-3-acetamide,
IH-indole-1-glyoxylamide, lH-indole-1-hydrazide, lH-indole-1-acetamides, indolizine-1-acetamides, indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazide, indolizine-1-glyoxylamide, indene-1-acetamide, indene-1-acetic acid hydrazide, indene-1-glyoxylamide, carbazoles, tetrahydrocarbazole, pyrazole, phenyl glyoxamide, pyrrole, naphthyl glyoxamide, or phenyl acetamide; for the manufacture of a medicant for treating cystic fibrosis in a mammal, including a human, currently afflicted with cystic fibrosis.
13. Use of 1 lH-indole-3-glyoxylamide compound selected from compounds represented by the formulae
Figure imgf000219_0001
Figure imgf000219_0002
and
Figure imgf000220_0001
for the manufacture of a medicant for treating osteoporosis
14. A method for treatment of a human currently afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-3-acetic acid hydrazide represented by the Formula (lb), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug derivative thereof;
Figure imgf000220_0002
wherein ;
X is oxygen or sulfur;
R]_ is selected from groups (i), (ii) and (iii) where; (i) is C4-C20 alkyl, C4-C20 alkenyl, C4-C20 alkynyl, C4-C20 haloalkyl, C4-C12 cycloalkyl, or
(ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, Cχ-Cιo alkylthio, Cχ-Cιo alkoxy, Cχ-C10 alkyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; (iii) is
Figure imgf000221_0001
where y is from 1 to 8, R74 is, independently, hydrogen or C -C o alkyl, and R75 is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, nitro, phenyl, -SH, Cι-C10 alkylthio, Cχ-Cιo alkoxy, C -C o alkyl, amino, hydroxyamino or a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 8 membered heterocyclic ring;
R2 is halo, C1-C3 alkyl, ethenyl, C]_-C2 alkylthio, C1-C2 alkoxy, -CHO, -CN; each R3 is independently hydrogen, C -C3 alkyl, or halo;
R4 R5, Rg, and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C_-C o alkyl, Cχ-C ø alkenyl, C]_-C]_Q alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R4 R5, Rg, and R7 combined with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a 5 or 6 membered substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclic ring; or Cχ-C]_o haloalkyl, Cχ-C o alkoxy, C -C_Q haloalkoxy, C4-C8 cycloalkoxy, phenoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxyl, -SH, -CN, -S(C]_-Cιo alkyl), arylthio, thioacetal, -0(0)0(02-010 alkyl), hydrazino, hydrazido, -NH2 , -NO2 , ~NRg2R83' anc^ -C (0) NR82^83' where, R82 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, Cχ-Cχo alkyl, C]_-C o hydroxyalkyl, or taken together with N, R82 and 83 form a 5 to 8 membered heterocyclic ring; or a group having the formula;
Figure imgf000222_0001
where, each R7g is independently selected from hydrogen, C^-C Q alkyl, hydroxy, or both R7 taken together are =0; p is 1 to 8,
Z is a bond, -0-, -N(Cχ-C]_o alkyl)-, -NH, or -S-; and
Q is -CON(R82R83) -5-tetrazolyl , -S0 H,
0
Figure imgf000222_0002
0 R ^8«6 r
P O ( CH2 ) „ N R86 ,
OR86 R 86 O
R; 86 o- p — o — ( CH2 ) H- N- R 86
OR; 86 R 86 o
0R86
Figure imgf000223_0001
where Rsg is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or C]_-C;LO alkyl.
15. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-3-acetamide SPLA2 inhibitor represented by formula (lib), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug derivative thereof,
Figure imgf000223_0002
wherein ;
X is oxygen or sulfur;
Rχi is selected from groups (i), (iii (iii) and (iv) where; (i) is Cg-C20 alkyl, C -C20 alkenyl, Cg-C20 alkynyl, Cg-C20 haloalkyl, C4-C12 cycloalkyl, or
(ii) is aryl or aryl substituted by halo, nitro, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C1-C10 alkyl, Ci-Ciø- alkylthio, Cχ-C10 alkoxyl, carboxyl, amino, or hydroxyamino; or
(iii) is -(CH2)n-(R8θ) , or -(NH)-(R8ι), where n is 1 to 8, and Rso is a group recited in (i) , and Rg]_ is selected from a group recited in (i) or (ii);
(iv) is
Re7
Figure imgf000224_0001
where R% η is hydrogen or C -C o alkyl, and RQ % is selected from the group; phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and biphenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by halo, -CN, -CHO, -OH, -SH, C -C o alkylthio, C -Cχo alkoxyl, phenyl, nitro, C -C o alkyl, C -C o haloalkyl, carboxyl, amino, hydroxyamino; or a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 8 membered heterocyclic ring;
R]_2 is halo, C -C2 alkylthio, or C -C2 alkoxy; each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halo, or methyl;
Rl4 Rl5' Rl6' anc Rl7 are each independently hydrogen, C -Cχo alkyl, C -C]_o alkenyl, C -C o alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or any two adjacent hydrocarbyl groups in the set R 4 R15, Rlgr and R17, combine with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a 5 or 6 membered substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclic ring; or C -Cχo haloalkyl, C -Cχo alkoxy, C -Cχo haloalkoxy, C4-C cycloalkoxy, phenoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxyl, -SH, -CN, cl~c10 alkylthio, arylthio, thioacetal, -C (0) 0 (Cχ-Cχo alkyl), hydrazide, hydrazino, hydrazido, -NH2, -NO2 , -NR82R83' anc _c (°) NR82R83' where, R 2 and Rg3 are independently hydrogen, Cχ-C o alkyl, Cχ-C o hydroxyalkyl, or taken together with N, R82 and R83 form a 5- to 8- membered heterocyclic ring; or a group having the formula;
Figure imgf000225_0001
where,
R8 and R85 are each independently selected from hydrogen, Cχ-Cχo alkyl, hydroxy, or R84 and R85 taken together are =0; p is 1 to 5,
Z is a bond, -0-, -N(Cχ-Cχo alkyl)-, -NH-, or -S-; and Q is -CON(R82R83) ' -5-tetrazolyl, -SO3H,
Figure imgf000225_0002
Figure imgf000226_0001
O
C I OR86
Figure imgf000226_0002
where n is 1 to 8, R g is independently selected from hydrogen, a metal, or Cχ-C o alkyl, and R99 is selected from hydrogen or C -C o alkyl.
16. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a A lH-indole-1-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ic);
Figure imgf000227_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, or C1-C3 alkyl; R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgo where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rso is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, C1-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group,
- (La) - (acidic group) ; wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) ;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
17. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a lH-indole-1-hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (lie);
Figure imgf000228_0001
wherein; X is oxygen or sulfur; each R is independently hydrogen, or C1-C3 alkyl; R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or (b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituent; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgθ'" where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rso is a group selected from (a) or (b) ; R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (C -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) ; wherein -( a)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group) ;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
18. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-1-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Id);
Figure imgf000229_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rχι is independently hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rχ3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgo; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ; Rχ2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rχ7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group); wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R 7 and R 8 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and
Rχ5 and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
19. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-1-acetic acid hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof where said compound is represented by the formula (lid);
Figure imgf000230_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rxx is independently hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rχ3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgθ'* where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgo is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
Rχ2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rχ7 and Rχ8 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) . wherein -(La)-' is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R 7 and Rχ must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and
Rχ5 and Rx are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
20. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-1-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Hid);
Figure imgf000232_0001
wherein ;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rx is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rχ3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgn; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rso i a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
Rχ2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rχ7 and Rχ8 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (acidic group) . wherein _(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R 7 and Rxg must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and
Rχ5 and Rxg are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
21. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-3-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (IVd), as set out below:
Figure imgf000233_0001
wherein;
X is selected from oxygen or sulfur; each R3 is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rx is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgθ'" where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rso is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, IL-, ) - (acidic group) . wherein Xy- is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R5 and Rg must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R7 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
22. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-3-hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Vd) , as set out below:
Figure imgf000234_0001
wherein;
X is selected from oxygen or sulfur; each R3 is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
Rx is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-RgQ; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rso is a group selected from (a) or (b) ; R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) . wherein _(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R5 and Rg must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R7 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
23. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indolizine-3-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (VId) , as set out below:
Figure imgf000235_0001
wherein;
X is selected from oxygen or sulfur; each R3 is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo; Rx is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where R80 is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
R5 and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group) . wherein ~(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of R5 and Rg must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R7 and R8 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
24. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indene-1-acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (If) ;
Figure imgf000237_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rx is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
R3 is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where Rgø is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, C -C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -O- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, ~(L- [acidic group) . wherein ~(La)-' is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents .
25. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indene-1-acetic acid hydrazide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ilf);
Figure imgf000238_0001
wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur; each Rx is independently hydrogen, Cχ-C3 alkyl, or halo;
R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where; (a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where RgQ is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0- (Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S- (C -C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, - (La) - (acidic group); wherein -(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group); and R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents .
26. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of an indene-1-glyoxylamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Illf);
Figure imgf000239_0001
wherein;
X is oxygen or sulfur; R3 is selected from groups (a) , (b) and (c) where;
(a) is C7-C20 alkyl, C7-C20 alkenyl, C7-C20 alkynyl, carbocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or (c) is the group -(L)-Rgø; where, - (L) - is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms and where RgQ is a group selected from (a) or (b) ; R2 is hydrogen, halo, Cχ-C3 alkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C4 cycloalkenyl, -0-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), -S-(Cχ-C2 alkyl), or a non-interfering substituent having a total of 1 to 3 atoms other than hydrogen;
Rg and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, a non-interfering substituent, or the group, [La) - (acidic group) . wherein _(La)-, is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 10; provided, that at least one of Rg and R7 must be the group, - (La) - (acidic group);
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radical, carbocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radical, and heterocyclic radical substituted with non-interfering substituents.
27. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the formula (Ie)
Figure imgf000240_0001
wherein;
A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position; one of B or D is nitrogen and the other is carbon;
Z is cyclohexenyl, phenyl, pyridyl, wherein the nitrogen is at the 1-, 2-, or 3-position, or a 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-, 2- or 3-position, and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-position; is a double or single bond; R ^ is selected from groups (a), (b) and (c) where; (a) is - (C5-C20) alkyl, - (C5-C20) alkenyl,
- (C5-C20) alkynyl, carbocyclic radicals, or heterocyclic radicals, or
(b) is a member of (a) substituted with one or more independently selected non-interfering substituents; or
(c) is the group -(L)-R^O; where, -(L)- is a divalent linking group of 1 to 12 atoms selected from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur; wherein the combination of atoms in -(L)- are selected from the group consisting of (i) carbon and hydrogen only, (ii) one sulfur only, (iii) one oxygen only, (iv) one or two nitrogen and hydrogen only, (v) carbon, hydrogen, and one sulfur only, and (vi) and carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen only; and where R°(-) is a group selected from (a) or (b) ;
R2i is a non-interfering substituent;
RI' is -NHNH , -NH2 or -CONH ;
R2' is selected from the group consisting of -OH, and -0(CH2) R5' where
R5' is H, -CN, -NH2, -C0NH2, -CONR9R10 -NHS02R15;
-CONHS02R15, where R15 is - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl or -CF3; phenyl or phenyl substituted with -CO2H or -CO2 (Cχ_C4 ) alkyl; and - (La) - (acidic group), wherein ~(La)~ is an acid linker having an acid linker length of 1 to 7 and t is 1-5;
R ' is selected from non-interfering substituent, carbocyclic radicals, carbocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents, heterocyclic radicals, and heterocyclic radicals substituted with non-interfering substituents; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof; provided that; when R3 ' is H, R2*-1 is benzyl and m is 1 or 2; R2 ' cannot be -0(CH2)mH; and provided that when D is nitrogen, the heteroatom of Z is selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at 0 the 1-, 2- or 3-position and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-position .
28. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to 5 said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound represented by the formula (He) :
Figure imgf000242_0001
20 wherein;
Z is cyclohexenyl, or phenyl;
R21 is a non-interfering substituent;
RI is -NHNH2 or ~NH2;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and
2 Δ D5 -0(CH2) mR5 where 0
II g 7
R5 is H, -C02H, -CONH2, -C02 (C1~C4 alkyl); _P(R R > , where R6 and R7 are each independently -OH or -0(C1-C4) alkyl; -So3H, -S03 (C1-C4 alkyl), tetrazolyl, -CN, -NH2, -NHS02R15; -CONHS02R15, where R15 is - (C. -O P alkyl or -CF,, phenyl or phenyl substituted with -C0 H or -CO^ (C1 -C. ) alkyl where m is 1-3;
R3 is H, -0(Cχ-C ) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C -C ) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF3; -CH2OSi (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -CONH2, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and RiO are independently - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; R4 is H, - (C5-CX4) alkyl, - (C3-C14 ) cycloalkyl, pyridyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo,
-CF3, -OCF3, - (Cχ-C4) alkoxy, -CN, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, phenyl (CI-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl, phenyl, phenoxy or naphthyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt, thereof .
29. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, wherein the method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a carbazole compound are selected from those represented by the formula (XXX) :
Figure imgf000244_0001
(XXX)
wherein :
R1 is -NHNH2, or -NH2;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of -OH and
-0(CH2„) mR5 where
0
R5 is H, -C02H, -CO^C^C^ alkyl); _p(R R ) , where R6 and R7 are each independently -OH or -0 (C, -C. ) alkyl; -SO3H, -S03(C1-C4 alkyl), tetrazolyl, -CN, -NH2 , -NHS02R15; -CONHS02R15, where R15 is - (C^Cg) alkyl or -CF,, phenyl or phenyl substituted with -C0„H or -C02 (C1-C4) alkyl where m is 1-3;
R3 is H, -0(Cχ-C ) alkyl, halo, - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, phenyl, - (C1-C4) alkylphenyl; phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo, or -CF3; -CH20Si (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, furyl, thiophenyl, - (Cχ-Cg) hydroxyalkyl; or -(CH2)nR8 where R8 is H, -C0NH2, -NR9R10, -CN or phenyl where R9 and Ri° are independently - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl or -phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl and n is 1 to 8; R4 is H, - (C5-CX4) alkyl, - (C3-Cχ4 ) cycloalkyl, pyridyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with - (Cχ-Cg) alkyl, halo, -CF3, -OCF3 , - (C1-C4) alkoxy, -CN, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, phenyl (CI-C4 ) alkyl, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkylphenyl, phenyl, phenoxy or naphthyl; A is phenyl or pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 5-,
6-, 7- or 8-position; Z is cyclohexenyl, phenyl, pyridyl wherein the nitrogen is at the 1-, 2- or 3-position or a 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur or oxygen at the 1-, 2- or 3-position and nitrogen at the 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-position, or wherein one carbon on the heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with =0; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug derivative or salt thereof; provided that one of A or Z is a heterocyclic ring.
30. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, wherein the method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from the following: 9-benzyl-5 , 7-dimethoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4- carboxylic acid hydrazide; 9-benzyl-5, 7-dimethoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazole-4- carboxamide; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxy-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol- 5-yl] oxyacetic acid sodium salt;
[ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxycarbazol-5-yl] oxyacetic acid; methyl [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-7-methoxycarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5-cyanomethyloxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide;
9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- (lH-tetrazol-5-yl-methyl) oxy) -1,2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; { 9- [ (phenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2-methyl-carbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (phenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoyl-2- (4-trifluoromethylphenyl) - carbazol-4-yl }oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-5- (2-methanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-7-methoxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-4- (2-methanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-2- methoxycarbazole-5-carboxamide;
9-benzyl-4- (2-trifluoromethanesulfonamido) ethyloxy-2- methoxycarbazole-5-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-5-methanesulfonamidoylmethyloxy-7-methoxy-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-4-methanesulfonamidoylmethyloxy-carbazole-5- carboxamide; [5-carbamoyl-2-pentyl-9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2- (1-methylethyl ) -9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid;
[5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (tri (-1- methylethyl) silyl) oxymethyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2-phenyl-9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid [5-carbamoyl-2- (4-chlorophenyl) -9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-2- (2-furyl) -9- (phenylmethyl) carbazol-4- yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (tri (-1- methylethyl) silyl) oxymethyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid, lithium salt; { 9- [ (phenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-phenoxyphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-Fluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-trifluoromethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-benzylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-trifluoromethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl} oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ ( 1-naphthyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-cyanophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; {9-[ (3-cyanophenyl ) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-methylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl} oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (3, 5-dimethylphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-iodophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; {9-[ (2-Chlorophenyl)methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2, 3-difluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2 , 6-difluorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl} oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (2, 6-dichlorophenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (3-trifluoromethoxyphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl}oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-biphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-Biphenyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; the { 9- [ (2-Biphenyl)methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4- yl } oxyacetic acid; [ 9-Benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbaole-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; { 9- [ (2-Pyridyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid;
{ 9- [ (3-Pyridyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl } oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-methyl-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-methylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-fluoro-1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-fluorocarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-8-chloro-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-5- yl] oxyacetic acid;
[ 9-benzyl-5-carbamoyl-l-chlorocarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9- [ (Cyclohexyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [ 9- [ (Cyclopentyl) methyl] -5-carbamoylcarbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid;
5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ [ (propen-3- yl) oxy]methyl] carbazol-4-yl] oxyacetic acid; [5-carbamoyl-9- (phenylmethyl) -2- [ (propyloxy) ethyl] carbazol- 4-yl] oxyacetic acid; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( (carboxamidomethyl) oxy) -1,2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5-cyanomethyloxy-carbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( ( lH-tetrazol-5-yl-methyl) oxy) - carbazole-4-carboxamide; 9-benzyl-7-methoxy-5- ( (carboxamidomethyl) oxy) -carbazole-4- carboxamide; and [ 9-Benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbaole-5- yl] oxyacetic acid (R, S) - (9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l-oxo-3-thia-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazol-5-yl) oxyacetic acid; { R, S) - (9-benzyl-4-carbamoyl-l-oxo-3-thia-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydrocarbazol-5-yl ) oxyacetic acid; [N-benzyl-l-carbamoyl-l-aza-1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydrocarbazol-8- yl] oxyacetic acid; 4-methoxy-6-methoxycarbonyl-10- phenylmethyl-6, 7,8, 9-tetrahydropyrido [ 1, 2-a] indole; ( 4 -carboxamido-9-phenylmethyl-4 , 5-dihydrothiopyrano [3,4- b] indol-5-yl) oxyacetic acid; 3, 4-dihydro-4-carboxamidol-5-methoxy-9- phenylmethylpyrano [3, 4-b] indole; 2- [(2,9 bis-benzyl-4- carbamoyl-1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydro-beta-carbolin-5- yl) oxy] acetic acid; or a pharmaceutically acceptable racemate, solvate, tautomer, optical isomer, prodrug, or salt thereof.
31. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, wherein the method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound represented by the formulae (Xe) or (Xle) below:
Figure imgf000250_0001
and
Figure imgf000250_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester prodrug derivative thereof.
32. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the formula (Ih) :
wherein : Ri is phenyl, isoquinolin-3-yl, pyrazinyl, pyridin-2- yl, pyridin-2-yl substituted at the 4-position with - (C1-C4) alkyl, (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxyl, -CN or -(CH2)n CONH2 where n is 0-2; R2 is phenyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of
- (Cχ-C ) alkyl, -CN, halo, -N02 , C02 (C -C ) alkyl and -CF3; naphthyl; thiophene or thiophene substituted with 1 to 3 halo groups; R3 is hydrogen; phenyl; phenyl (C2_Cg) alkenyl; pyridyl; naphthyl; quinolinyl; (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthiazolyl; phenyl substituted with 1 to 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of - (Cχ-C4) alkyl, -CN, -CONH2, -N02 , -CF3, halo, (C -C4) alkoxy, CO2 (Cχ-C ) alkyl, phenoxy and SR4 where R4 is - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl or halophenyl; phenyl substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of
-0(CH2)pR5 where p is 1 to 3 and R5 is -CN, -CO2H, -CONH2, or tetrazolyl, phenyl and -OR^ where R^ is cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl, or phenyl substituted with halo or (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxy; or phenyl substituted with two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached form a methylenedioxy ring; and m is 1 to 5; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
33. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the formula (Ii) :
Figure imgf000252_0001
wherein :
X is -0- or -(CH2) -, where m is 0 or 1;
Y is -C02-, -PO3-, -SO3-;
R is independently -H or - (C1-C4) alkyl;
Ri and R2 are each independently -H, halo or - (Cχ-C4) alkyl; R3 and R4 are each independently -H, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxy, (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, halo, phenyl or phenyl substituted with halo; n is 1-8; and p is 1 when Y is -CO2- or -SO3- and 1 or 2 when Y is -PO3-; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
34. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the formula (I) :
Figure imgf000253_0001
Ri is hydrogen, (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of - (Cχ-C ) alkyl, (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, (Cχ-C4 ) alkylthio, halo and phenyl;
R2 is hydrogen, - (C1-C4) alkyl, halo, (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxy or (Cχ-C4) alkylthio;
R3 and R4 are each hydrogen or when taken together are =0;
R5 is -NH2 or -NHNH2;
R^ and R^ are each hydrogen or when one of R^ and R^ is hydrogen, the other is - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, -(CH2)nRl° where R10 is -CO2R11, -P03(R11)2, -Pθ4(R11)2 or -SO3R11 where R11 is independently hydrogen or - (Cχ-C ) alkyl and n is 0 to 4; or R" and R^ , taken together, are =0 or =S; X is R8 (Cχ-Cg) alkyl; R8 (C2-Cg) alkenyl or phenyl substituted at the ortho position with R8 where R8 is (CH2)nR10 where R10 is -C02R1:I, -P03(R11) , -Pθ4(R ) or -SO3RU, RU and n is 1 to 4 as defined above, and additionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, - (Cχ-C ) alkyl, halo, (Cχ-C ) alkoxy, or two substituents which, when taken together with the phenyl ring to which they are attached, form a naphthyl group; and
R9 is hydrogen or methyl or ethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
35. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a naphthyl glyoxamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Ik)
Figure imgf000254_0001
wherein : R and R2 are each independently hydrogen or a non- interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of R or R2 must be hydrogen;
X is -CH2- or -0-; and
Y is (CH2)nZ where n is a number from 1-3 and Z is an acid group selected from the group consisting of CO2H, -SO3H or -PO(OH) -
36. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound by the formula (II) :
Figure imgf000255_0001
wherein:
R1 is -H or -0(CH2)nZ;
R2 is -H or -OH;
R3 and R4 are each independently -H, halo or
- (Cχ-C ) alkyl;
One of R5 and R6 is -YR7 and the other is -H, where Y is -0- or -CH2- and R7 is phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, - (Cχ-C4 ) alkyl, (Cχ-C4 ) alkoxy, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one or two halo groups;
Z is -CO2R, -PO3R2 or -SO3R where R is -H or
- (C1-C4) alkyl; and n is 1-8 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, racemate or optical isomer thereof; provided that when R^ is YR7 , R is hydrogen; and when R1, R2 , R3, R4 and R6 are hydrogen and R5 is YR7 where Y is -0-, R7 cannot be phenyl; and when R1, R2, R3, R4 and Rβ are hydrogen, R5 is YR7 where Y is CH2, R7 cannot be phenyl substituted with one methoxy or two chloro groups.
37. A method for treatment of a human afflicted with cystic fibrosis, said method comprising administering to said human in need of such treatment, a therapeutically effective amount of a naphthyl acetamide compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug derivative thereof; wherein said compound is represented by the formula (Im) :
Figure imgf000256_0001
wherein:
Ri and R2 are each independently hydrogen or a non-interfering substituent with the proviso that at least one of R and R2 must be hydrogen;
CH-, Q
R3 is hydrogen, -0(CH2)nY, 0 i(>A): -0 where n is from 2 to 4 and Y is -CO2H, -PO3H2 or SO3H; and X is -0- or -CH2~.
38. The method of claim 13 or 14 or 15 or 16 or 17 or 18 or 19 or 20 or 21 or 22 or 23 or 24 or 25 or 26 or 27 or 28 or 29 or 30 or 31 or 32 or 33 or 34 or 35 or 36 or 37 wherein the administration is intravenous.
39. The method of claim 13 or 14 or 15, or 16 or 17 or 18 or 19 or 20 or 21 or 22 or 23 or 24 or 25 or 26 or 27 or 28 or 29 or 30 or 31 or 32 or 33 or 34 or 35 or 36 or 37 wherein the administration is oral.
40. The method of claim 8 or 15 or 16 or 17 or 18 or 19 or 20 or 21 or 22 or 23 or 24 or 25 or 26 or 27 or 28 or 29 or 30 or 31 or 32 or 33 or 34 or 35 or 36 or 37 wherein treatment is of a mammal afflicted with a cystic fibrosis and the inhibitor is administered in a therapeutically effective amount to achieve a human blood level inhibitor concentration of from 10 to 3000 nanograms/ml.
PCT/US1998/019906 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis WO1999016453A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002304482A CA2304482A1 (en) 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
US09/508,209 US6576654B1 (en) 1998-09-23 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
JP2000513587A JP2001517707A (en) 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Methods for treating cystic fibrosis
EP98950654A EP1007056A1 (en) 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
AU96641/98A AU9664198A (en) 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US6012897P 1997-09-26 1997-09-26
US60/060,128 1997-09-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999016453A1 true WO1999016453A1 (en) 1999-04-08

Family

ID=22027540

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1998/019906 WO1999016453A1 (en) 1997-09-26 1998-09-23 Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1007056A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2001517707A (en)
AU (1) AU9664198A (en)
CA (1) CA2304482A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999016453A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0950661A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 1999-10-20 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted tricyclics useful in sPLA2 induced diseases
DE19962300A1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2001-06-28 Asta Medica Ag New N-benzylindolyl glyoxylic acid derivatives are useful as antitumor agents
SG81977A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 2001-07-24 Lilly Co Eli Substituted tricyclics
WO2001055108A2 (en) * 2000-01-25 2001-08-02 Eli Lilly And Company Use of spl a2 inhibitors for the treatment of inflammation
WO2002000621A1 (en) * 2000-06-29 2002-01-03 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Compounds exhibiting x-type spla2 inhibiting effect
WO2002012249A2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-14 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted pyrrole compounds and their use as spla2 inhibitors
US6576654B1 (en) * 1998-09-23 2003-06-10 Eli Lilly And Company Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
US6730694B1 (en) 2001-07-20 2004-05-04 Eli Lilly And Company sPLA2 inhibitors
US6911476B2 (en) * 2000-03-13 2005-06-28 Eli Lilly And Company Sulfonamide derivatives
WO2021249529A1 (en) * 2020-06-12 2021-12-16 Nucmito Pharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Indene compounds, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their therapeutic applications

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1865949B1 (en) * 2005-03-11 2012-11-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Modulators of ATP-binding cassette transporters
WO2010027762A1 (en) * 2008-09-04 2010-03-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Indolizine inhibitors of leukotriene production

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5405852A (en) * 1992-06-04 1995-04-11 Zeneca Limited Amide derivatives
US5436258A (en) * 1992-09-09 1995-07-25 Eli Lilly And Company Prevention of bone resorption
US5453443A (en) * 1994-07-20 1995-09-26 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Bis(aryloxy)alkanes as inhibitors of phospholipase A2 enzymes
US5532366A (en) * 1992-07-02 1996-07-02 Zeneca Limited Heterocyclic amides
US5547975A (en) * 1994-09-20 1996-08-20 Talley; John J. Benzopyranopyrazolyl derivatives for the treatment of inflammation
US5719149A (en) * 1994-09-02 1998-02-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Ltd. Morpholine derivatives and their use as therapeutic agents
US5807829A (en) * 1994-11-21 1998-09-15 Cortech, Inc. Serine protease inhibitor--tripeptoid analogs

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5405852A (en) * 1992-06-04 1995-04-11 Zeneca Limited Amide derivatives
US5532366A (en) * 1992-07-02 1996-07-02 Zeneca Limited Heterocyclic amides
US5436258A (en) * 1992-09-09 1995-07-25 Eli Lilly And Company Prevention of bone resorption
US5453443A (en) * 1994-07-20 1995-09-26 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Bis(aryloxy)alkanes as inhibitors of phospholipase A2 enzymes
US5719149A (en) * 1994-09-02 1998-02-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Ltd. Morpholine derivatives and their use as therapeutic agents
US5547975A (en) * 1994-09-20 1996-08-20 Talley; John J. Benzopyranopyrazolyl derivatives for the treatment of inflammation
US5565482A (en) * 1994-09-20 1996-10-15 G.D. Searle & Co. Heteroarylpyranopyrazolyl derivatives for the treatment of inflammation
US5807829A (en) * 1994-11-21 1998-09-15 Cortech, Inc. Serine protease inhibitor--tripeptoid analogs

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SG81977A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 2001-07-24 Lilly Co Eli Substituted tricyclics
SG81976A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 2001-07-24 Lilly Co Eli Substituted tricyclics
EP1156050A2 (en) * 1998-04-17 2001-11-21 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted tricyclics useful in sPLA2 induced diseases
EP1156050A3 (en) * 1998-04-17 2001-11-28 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted tricyclics useful in sPLA2 induced diseases
EP0950661A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 1999-10-20 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted tricyclics useful in sPLA2 induced diseases
SG106035A1 (en) * 1998-04-17 2004-09-30 Lilly Co Eli Substituted tricyclics
US6576654B1 (en) * 1998-09-23 2003-06-10 Eli Lilly And Company Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
DE19962300A1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2001-06-28 Asta Medica Ag New N-benzylindolyl glyoxylic acid derivatives are useful as antitumor agents
WO2001055108A2 (en) * 2000-01-25 2001-08-02 Eli Lilly And Company Use of spl a2 inhibitors for the treatment of inflammation
WO2001055108A3 (en) * 2000-01-25 2001-12-20 Lilly Co Eli Use of spl a2 inhibitors for the treatment of inflammation
US6911476B2 (en) * 2000-03-13 2005-06-28 Eli Lilly And Company Sulfonamide derivatives
WO2002000621A1 (en) * 2000-06-29 2002-01-03 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Compounds exhibiting x-type spla2 inhibiting effect
US7026318B2 (en) 2000-06-29 2006-04-11 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Compounds exhibiting X-type sPLA2 inhibiting effect
WO2002012249A3 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-07-18 Lilly Co Eli Substituted pyrrole compounds and their use as spla2 inhibitors
WO2002012249A2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-14 Eli Lilly And Company Substituted pyrrole compounds and their use as spla2 inhibitors
US6730694B1 (en) 2001-07-20 2004-05-04 Eli Lilly And Company sPLA2 inhibitors
WO2021249529A1 (en) * 2020-06-12 2021-12-16 Nucmito Pharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Indene compounds, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their therapeutic applications

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1007056A1 (en) 2000-06-14
AU9664198A (en) 1999-04-23
JP2001517707A (en) 2001-10-09
CA2304482A1 (en) 1999-04-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6514984B1 (en) Treatment for alzheimer's disease
US6610728B2 (en) Method for treatment of non-rheumatoid arthritis
KR20180042356A (en) How to treat cancer
WO1999016453A1 (en) Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
EP1007046A1 (en) 1h-indole-3-glyoxylamides for the treatment of chronic bronchitis
WO1999024033A1 (en) Method for the treatment of disorders associated with apoptosis using n-heterocyclic glyoxylamide compounds
US6576654B1 (en) Method for the treatment of cystic fibrosis
CA2310249A1 (en) Treatment for alzheimer's disease
KR20200135743A (en) Novel use of pyrolo-pyridine derivatives for preventing or treating cancer
US20030087944A1 (en) Method for the treatment of renal dysfunction with spla2 inhibitors
EP1214041A2 (en) Combination therapy for the treatment of sepsis
WO1998047507A1 (en) Method for the treatment of stroke using n-heterocyclic glyoxylamide compounds
WO2001055108A2 (en) Use of spl a2 inhibitors for the treatment of inflammation
TW202128687A (en) 4-amino-imidazoquinoline compounds and use thereof
WO2001049323A1 (en) Combination therapy for the treatment of inflammatory and respiratory diseases
WO2001066111A1 (en) Compositions containing potential spla2 inhibitors for the treatment of pain
US20030092767A1 (en) Combination therapy for the treatment of inflammatory and respiratory diseases
WO2001066110A2 (en) METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF RENAL DYSFUNCTION WITH sPLA2 INHIBITORS
US20110201678A1 (en) Xanthenone-4-Acetic Acid Derivatives
US20210382037A1 (en) Identification and use of cytotoxic t lymphocyte (ctl) antigen-specific target cell killing enhancer agents
US20030149000A1 (en) Method for the treatment of disorders associated with apoptosis using N-heterocyclic glyoxylamide compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 09508209

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2304482

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2304482

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1998950654

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2000 513587

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1998950654

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1998950654

Country of ref document: EP